- Manuals
- Brands
- GE Manuals
- Protection Device
- MiCOM P40 Agile
- Technical manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
GE Energy Connections
Grid Solutions
MiCOM P40 Agile
P442, P444
Technical Manual
Numerical Distance Protection Relay
Hardware version: M
Software version: 72
Publication reference: P44x/EN M/Hb6
Related Manuals for GE MiCOM P40 Agile
Summary of Contents for GE MiCOM P40 Agile
-
Page 1
GE Energy Connections Grid Solutions MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Technical Manual Numerical Distance Protection Relay Hardware version: M Software version: 72 Publication reference: P44x/EN M/Hb6… -
Page 3: Introduction
CONTENTS Section 1 Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Section 2 Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Section 3 Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Section 4 Settings P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Section 5 Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Section 6 Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Section 7 Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Section 8 Firmware Design…
-
Page 5
Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 SAFETY SECTION… -
Page 6
P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section… -
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) — 1 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT Symbols Labels INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Protective fuse rating Protective class Installation category Environment…
-
Page 8
P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) — 2… -
Page 9: Health And Safety
Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) — 3 STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR ALSTOM GRID EQUIPMENT INTRODUCTION This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
-
Page 10: Symbols
P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) — 4 SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
-
Page 11
Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) — 5 Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Alstom Grid strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation’s automation system, for alarm purposes. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. -
Page 12
P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) — 6 UL and CSA/CUL listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. -
Page 13: De-Commissioning And Disposal
Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) — 7 External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
-
Page 14: Installation Category
P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) — 8 Installation category IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III): EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
-
Page 15
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-1 INTRODUCTION Date: 2017… -
Page 16
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 17
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES INTRODUCTION TO MICOM PRODUCT SCOPE Ordering options… -
Page 18
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 19: Contents
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-5 INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES This manual provides a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application. The section contents are summarized below:…
-
Page 20: Environment
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 P44x/EN SC SCADA Communications This section provides an overview regarding the SCADA communication interfaces of the relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics, profiles and interoperability tables are not provided within this manual. Separate documents are available per protocol, available for download from our website.
-
Page 21: Introduction To Micom
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-7 INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from General Electric. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
-
Page 22: Product Scope
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 PRODUCT SCOPE The MiCOM P442 and P444 Numerical Full Scheme Distance Relays provide comprehensive distance protection for different applications like: lines, cables, tapped lines, lines with multiple zero sequence sources, non-homogeneous lines, series compensated lines and parallel lines.
-
Page 23
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-9 Protection Functions Overview ANSI IEC 61850 Features P442 P444 • • 50BF RBRF Circuit breaker failure PTRC Tripping 1/3p 1/3p RREC Autoreclose (4 shots) 1/3p 1/3p • • RSYN Check synchronism •… -
Page 24
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • User friendly setting and analysis software (MiCOM S1 Agile) Application overview Figure 1: Functional diagram Rating options Auxiliary Voltage Rating options Features P442 P444 • • 24 – 48 Vdc only •… -
Page 25
Introduction P44x/EN IT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IT) 1-11 Ordering options Variants Order No. Distance Protection P442 P44 2 Nominal auxiliary voltage 24-54 Vdc 48-125 Vdc (40-100 Vac) 110-250 Vdc (100-240 Vac) In/Vn rating Dual rated CT (1 & 5A : 100 — 120V) (∑… -
Page 26
P44x/EN IT/Hb6 Introduction (IT) 1-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Variants Order No. Distance Protection P444 P444 Nominal auxiliary voltage 24-54 Vdc 48-125 Vdc (40-100 Vac) 110-250 Vdc (100-240 Vac) In/Vn rating Dual rated CT (1 & 5A : 100 — 120V) Module Sum (∑1A / PXDB) -
Page 27
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-1 TECHNICAL DATA Date: 2017… -
Page 28
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 29: Ordering Options
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-3 Technical Data Mechanical Specification P442 & P444 Numerical Distance Protection: Design ∗ 1 & 3 Pole tripping/reclosing (P442 & P444) Modular MiCOM Px40 platform relay available in three different case sizes: In/Vn rating (ordering option): ∗…
-
Page 30
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Rear Communications Port Optional Rear redundant Ethernet K-Bus/EIA(RS485) signal levels, two wire connection for IEC 61850 Connections located on general purpose block, M4 screw. 100 Base FX Interface For screened twisted pair cable, multidrop, Interface in accordance with IEEE802.3 and… -
Page 31
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-5 Ratings Power supply AC Measuring Inputs Auxiliary Voltage (Vx) Nominal frequency: Three ordering options: ∗ 50 and 60 Hz (settable) (i) Vx: 24 to 48 Vdc Operating range: (ii) Vx: 48 to 110 Vdc, and 40 to 100Vac (rms) ∗… -
Page 32
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Output Contacts Environmental Conditions Standard Contacts Ambient Temperature Range General purpose relay outputs for signalling, Ambient temperature range tripping and alarming: Operating temperature range: ∗ –25°C to +55°C (or –13°F to +131°F) -
Page 33
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-7 Fast transient disturbances on power High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand supply (common mode only): 4 kV, 5 ns rise (EIA RS232 ports excepted). time, 50 ns decay time, 5 kHz repetition… -
Page 34
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Mechanical Robustness Per IEC 61000-4-8: 2001, Level 5, ∗ 100 A/m applied continuously, Vibration Test ∗ 1000 A/m applied for 3 s. Per IEC 60255-21-1: 1996… -
Page 35
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-9 Transient Overreach: Additional tolerance due Timing and Accuracy to increasing X/R ratios: ±5% over the X/R ratio from 1 to 90 PERFORMANCE DATA Breaker fail timers accuracy: For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is ±… -
Page 36
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL AND NON-DIRECTIONAL (I<1,I<2) EARTH FAULT PROTECTION Accuracy (IN>1, IN>2, IN>3 or IN>4) Pick-up: ±10% or 0.025 In, whichever is greater Accuracy Setting ±5% ±5% DT Pick-up: Drop-off: 1.05 ×Setting ±5%… -
Page 37
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-11 CURRENT TRANSFORMER MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING SUPERVISION FACILITIES Accuracy Accuracy ± ± Setting ±5% IN> Pick-up: Typically 1%, but 0.5% between Setting ±5% VN< Pick-up: 0.2 — 2In/Vn 0.9 × setting ±5% IN>… -
Page 38
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Ethernet data FAULT AND DISTURBANCE RECORDS (where applicable) Accuracy 10 Base T /100 Base TX Communications Time and date stamping: ±2 ms of applied fault/event Interface in accordance with IEEE802.3 and Fault clearance time: ±2%… -
Page 39
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-13 DISTANCE PROTECTION SETTINGS, MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDS LIST Line setting Line Length (Ln): 0.3 to 1000 km (step 0.010) or 0.2 to 625 miles (step 0.005) SETTINGS LIST Line Impedance: 0.001×I1 to 500×I1 (step 0.001×I1) -
Page 40
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ∗ None, Zone Setting other parameters ∗ Loss of Guard mode, Serial Compensated ∗ Loss of Carrier mode. Line: Enabled/Disabled Overlap Z mode: Enabled/Disabled Z1m Tilt Angle: –45° to +45° (step 1°) Z1p Tilt Angle: –45°… -
Page 41
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-15 TOR (Trip On Reclose)–SOTF (Switch On To DIRECTIONAL AND NON DIRECTIONAL Fault) modes enabled or disabled for: ∗ TOR logic in case of fault in Z1, Z2, Z3 or… -
Page 42
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ∗ US Inverse DIRECTIONAL AND NON-DIRECTIONAL ∗ US Short Time Inverse ∗ IN> (%max) EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT 10% to 100% (step 1%) PROTECTION I2>1 / I2>2 Directional: Earth Fault O/C ∗… -
Page 43
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-17 AIDED DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT VOLTAGE PROTECTION (DEF) OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION V< & V> modes (threshold activation): ∗ V<1 function: activated/deactivated Aided DEF Status: Enabled/Disabled ∗ V<2 status: activated/deactivated Polarisation: ∗ V<3 status: ∗… -
Page 44
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 CB CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL AND I< CB Control by: PROTECTION (CB FAIL & I<) ∗ Disabled, Circuit Breaker Fail ∗ Local, CB Fail 1 Status: Disabled/Enabled ∗ Remote, CB Fail 1 timer: 0 to 10 s (step 0.01 s) -
Page 45: Dnp3.0
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-19 DNP3.0 protocol: MEASURED OPERATING DATA Protocol indicated (MEASURE’T SETUP) RP1 Address: 7 to 34 (step 1) RP1 Inactiv timer: 1 mn to 30 mn (step 1 mn) Default Display: ∗…
-
Page 46
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 COMMISSIONING TESTS Teleprotection (InterMiCOM comms) Status of opto-isolated inputs indication, Source Address: 0 to 10 (step 1) Status of output relays indication, Received Address: 0 to 10 (step 1) -
Page 47
Technical Data P44x/EN TD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TD) 2-21 IED configurator (IEC61850) Autorecloser MiCOM P442 & P444 only Switch between active or inactive configuration Autoreclose mode: banks, Number of shots: ∗ 1P trip mode: MiCOM Configuration Language (MCL) files 1, 1/3, 1/3/3 or 1/3/3/3 ∗… -
Page 48
P44x/EN TD/Hb6 Technical Data (TD) 2-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Security config When Option installed The security configuration features allows password attempts setting and port access enabling: ∗ Attemps to enter a valid ∗ password setting: 0 to 3 ∗… -
Page 49
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-1 GETTING STARTED Date: 2017… -
Page 50
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 51
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-3 CONTENTS GETTING STARTED User interfaces and menu structure Introduction to the relay 1.2.1 Front panel 1.2.2 Relay rear panel Relay connection and power-up Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Menu structure 1.5.1… -
Page 52
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 53
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-5 GETTING STARTED Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section/Safety Guide Pxxx-SG-4L-2 or later issue, the Technical Data chapter and the ratings on the equipment rating label. -
Page 54
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Hotkey functionality (Figure 1): • SCROLL: Starts scrolling through the various default displays. • STOP: Stops scrolling the default display for control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation. -
Page 55
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-7 A – Optional board * F – Output relay/High Break board * B – Optional board * G – Output relay board C – Current and voltage input board F –… -
Page 56
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay connection and power-up Before powering-up the relay, confirm that the relay power supply voltage and nominal ac signal magnitudes are appropriate for your application. The relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating, power rating information can be viewed under the top… -
Page 57
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-9 Keypad/ Courier Modbus IEC 870-5-103 DNP3.0 IEC 61850 Reset of fault & • • • • • alarm records Clear event & • • • • • fault records Time •… -
Page 58
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.5.1 Protection settings The protection settings include the following items: • protection element settings • scheme logic settings ∗ • auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)* • fault locator settings (where appropriate)* There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. -
Page 59
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-11 Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation Read Some SYSTEM DATA column: Password Entry Write Minimal Description LCD Contrast (user interface only) Plant Reference Model Number Serial Number S/W Ref. -
Page 60
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation Read All All data and settings are All items writeable at level 2. readable. Write All Change all Setting cells Poll Measurements Operations: — Extract and download Setting file. -
Page 61
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-13 configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group. -
Page 62
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.8.1 Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. -
Page 63
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-15 1.8.1.1 Cyber Security Figure 5 depicts the navigation between default displays. Figure 5: Default display navigation The right cursor key takes you to the next menu option in a clockwise direction, whereas the left cursor key takes you to the next menu option in an anti-clockwise direction. -
Page 64
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.8.3 Hotkey menu navigation The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on the LCD. -
Page 65
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-17 Px4x P1246ENk Figure 6: Hotkey menu navigation 1.8.4 Password entry 1.8.4.1 Standard relays When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above. -
Page 66
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Enter Password 1. A flashing cursor shows which character field of the password can be changed. Press the up or down cursor keys to change each character (tip: pressing the up arrow once will return an upper case «A»… -
Page 67
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-19 Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. -
Page 68
Getting Started (GS) 3-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. -
Page 69
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-21 Start Start Data Model Manager Download data models Start S1 Agile Open Click System Offline system Explorer tile then Open system or Online or offline? New System tile or… -
Page 70
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. 1.10.1.3 Set up a System 1. Click the System Explorer tile then the New System tile or Open System tile. 2. From the menu bar select View then System Explorer. -
Page 71
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-23 3. Once the file is retrieved, click Close. 1.10.1.10 Extract an event file from a device 1. Using System Explorer, find the device. 2. Right-click the device’s Events folder and select Extract Events. -
Page 72
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • extract disturbance records from a device • control breakers and isolators • set the date and time on a device • set the active group on a device •… -
Page 73
Getting Started P44x/EN GS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (GS) 3-25 By loading a copy of the current menu text file in one of the standard languages into the reference column, you can type the appropriate translation of each menu entry into the target column. -
Page 74
P44x/EN GS/Hb6 Getting Started (GS) 3-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 75
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-1 SETTING Date: 2017… -
Page 76
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 77
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-3 CONTENTS SETTINGS Relay setting configuration (“System Data” column) Configuration column (“Configuration” menu) 1.2.1 Alternative setting groups 1.2.2 Selection of Setting Groups PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Distance zone settings (“Distance” menu) Distance protection schemes (“Distance Scheme” menu) Power Swing detection and blocking (PSB) (“Power swing”… -
Page 78
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.7.2 Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-103 3.7.3 Communication settings for Modbus protocol 3.7.4 Communication settings for DNP3.0 protocol 3.7.5 Communications for Ethernet port – IEC 61850 protocol “Commissioning tests” column Opto inputs configuration (“Universal Input”… -
Page 79
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-5 SETTINGS The MiCOM P44x protection must be configured to the system and application by means of appropriate settings. The sequence of the settings is listed and described in this section. -
Page 80
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. SYSTEM DATA Software Ref. 2 Software Ref. 2 is displayed for a relay with IEC 61850 protocol only and displays the software version of the Ethernet card. -
Page 81
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-7 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. SYSTEM DATA Password Level 2 **** Allows user to change password level 2. Password in relays with Cyber Security features may be any length between 0 and 8 characters long (see section P44x/EN CS for password strengthening and validation and blank password management). -
Page 82
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Menu text Default setting Available settings CONFIGURATION Copy From Group 1 Group1,2,3 or 4 Allows displayed settings to be copied from a selected setting group. Copy To No Operation No Operation / Group1, 2, 3 or 4 Allows displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group (ready to paste). -
Page 83
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-9 Menu text Default setting Available settings CONFIGURATION Thermal Overload Disabled Enabled or Disabled To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the thermal overload protection function. I< Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Undercurrent protection function. -
Page 84
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Menu text Default setting Available settings CONFIGURATION Direct Access Enabled Enabled or Disabled Defines what CB control direct access is allowed. Enabled implies control via menu, hotkeys etc. Inter MiCOM… -
Page 85
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-11 appropriate setting group can be selected as required. This facility is extremely useful in the case of unattended substations where all of the switching can be controlled remotely. Main bus… -
Page 86
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Binary State of SG Change bit 1 Binary State of SG Change bit 0 Setting Group Opto 2 Opto 1 Activated Table 1 — Setting Group Selection REMINDER: IF SELECTED IN THE MENU (CHANGE BY OPTOS), OPTO 1 & 2 MUST… -
Page 87
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-13 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Distance zone settings (“Distance” menu) The “Distance elements” menu setting is used to set the line protection (line and zone setting). The Zone setting menu allows 6 zones setting. -
Page 88
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – DISTANCE ELEMENTS 15/In Ω 0.001/In Ω 500/In Ω 0.001/In Ω 10/In Ω 400/In Ω 0.01/In Ω R1G: Resistive reach (Earth fault element, refer to P44x/EN AP for resistive reach calculation (earth and phase) setting). -
Page 89
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-15 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – DISTANCE ELEMENTS 25/In Ω 400/In Ω 0.01/In Ω RpG: Resistive reach – Earth fault element for zone P. 25/In Ω… -
Page 90
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – DISTANCE ELEMENTS OTHER PARAMETERS Serial Cmp.line Disable Enable Disable Serial Compensated Line: If enabled, the Directional Line used in the Delta Algorithms is set at 90°… -
Page 91
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-17 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – DISTANCE ELEMENTS Vmem Validity 10mss The duration of the voltage memory availability after fault detection can be set. When the voltage memory is declared unavailable (e.g. -
Page 92
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: DISTANCE SCHEMES Program Mode Standard Scheme Standard Scheme Open Scheme The ‘Program Mode’ cell is used to select the standard program mode or open program mode. -
Page 93
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-19 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: DISTANCE SCHEMES Aid dist. Delay 0.02s 0.002s Available with PUP Z2, PUP FWD, POP Z1 and POP Z2 schemes. This time-delay represents the end of transmission time in blocking scheme: if the remote relay has picked up in zone 2, then it will trip after the “Aid Dist. -
Page 94
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: DISTANCE SCHEMES Z1 Ext. on Chan. Fail Disabled Disabled or Enabled Enable or disable the “Z1X extension on channel fail”: For the duration of any alarm condition (loss of guard, loss of carrier), the “zone 1 extension”… -
Page 95
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-21 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: DISTANCE SCHEMES LOL undercurrent detector that indicates a loss of load condition on the unfaulted phases, indicating that the remote end has just opened. -
Page 96
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: POWER SWING IN > (% Imax) 100% Residual current threshold for power swing unblocking. It is a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase. -
Page 97
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-23 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1: POWER SWING Stable swing Threshold of number of Stable Swings. Triggers DDB #353 when reached. Setting of the number of steps to confirm Stable Swing condition. -
Page 98
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – BACK-UP I> time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1. Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity. -
Page 99
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-25 improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Therefore, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to- phase and phase to earth faults. -
Page 100
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>1 Time VTS 0.200 s 100.0 s 0.01 s Sets the VTS time-delay. The VTS alarm will occur if VT fault occurs during more than the VTS time-delay. -
Page 101
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-27 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>4 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled I2>4 Directional Non Directional Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional I2>4 VTS Block… -
Page 102
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-28 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Broken conductor detection The following table shows the relay menu for the Broken Conductor protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults: Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 –… -
Page 103
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-29 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse,… -
Page 104
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-30 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – EARTH FAULT O/C IN>2 Directional Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev IN>2 VTS Block Non directional Block, Non directional IN>2 Current Set… -
Page 105
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-31 Aided Directional Earth Fault (DEF) protection schemes (“Aided D.E.F” menu) The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 –… -
Page 106
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-32 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size characteristic. Thermal Alarm 100% An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity. -
Page 107
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-33 2.12 Undercurrent protection (“I< protection” menu) This menu contains undercurrent protection functions. 2.12.1 Undercurrent protection The undercurrent protection included within the P442 and P444 relays consists of two independent stages. -
Page 108
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-34 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – VOLT Protection UNDER VOLTAGE V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-phase, Phase-neutral Select the undervoltage protection to operate from a phase to phase voltage or phase to earth measurement. -
Page 109
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-35 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – VOLT PROTECTION OVERVOLTAGE V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-phase, Phase-neutral, Independent Select the overvoltage protection to operate from a phase to phase voltage, phase to earth measurement or Independent. -
Page 110
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-36 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – VOLT PROTECTION V>3 Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-phase, Phase-neutral This setting is to select the measurement mode Phase-Phase or Phase-Neutral for stage 3 of the Overvoltage Protection. -
Page 111
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-37 2.14.2 Overfrequency protection Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – FREQ PROTECTION OVERFREQUENCY F>1 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled Setting to enable or disable the first overfrequency element. The F>1 threshold setting and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when F>1 status is enabled. -
Page 112
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-38 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – CB FAIL & I< CBF Ext Reset CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<, Prot Reset or I<, Disable… -
Page 113
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-39 NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Circuit breaker condition monitoring (“CB Condition” and “CB monitor setup” menus) 3.1.1 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features For each circuit breaker trip and autoreclose operation the relay, records statistics. The ‘CB condition’… -
Page 114
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-40 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.1.2 CB condition monitoring The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout. -
Page 115
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-41 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size CB Time Lockout Alarm Disabled Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm. CB Time Lockout 0.2s… -
Page 116
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-42 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size CB CONTROL Opto+Rem+local This setting selects the type of circuit breaker control that be used in the logic (trip and close): – Local: Local trip or close of the circuit breaker using the front panel of the relay (‘System Data / CB Trip/Close’… -
Page 117
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-43 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size CB CONTROL ‘A/R Single Pole’ and ‘A/R Three pole’ must be enabled for validating the autoreclose function (“Autoreclose” menu, 1 pole (1P) and 3 poles (3P) cells. -
Page 118
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-44 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. CT AND VT RATIOS Main VT Location Line Line / Bus The Check Sync VT may be connected to either a phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage. -
Page 119
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-45 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. RECORD CONTROL System Event Enabled Enabled or Disabled Disabling this setting means that no System Events will be generated. Fault Rec. Event… -
Page 120
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-46 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. DISTURB RECORDER This sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5 s pre-fault and 1.0 s post fault recording times. -
Page 121
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-47 Measurements (“Measure’t setup” column) This column is visible when the “Measure’t Setup” setting (“Configuration” column) = “visible”. Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. MEASUREMENT SETUP Description / Plant Reference / U – I –… -
Page 122
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-48 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. MEASUREMENT SETUP Fault Location Distance Distance / Ohm / % of Line The calculated fault location can be displayed using one of several options selected using this setting. -
Page 123
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-49 3.7.2 Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-103 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol IEC60870-5-103 Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port. -
Page 124
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-50 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.7.3 Communication settings for Modbus protocol Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol Modbus Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port. -
Page 125
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-51 3.7.4 Communication settings for DNP3.0 protocol Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol Protocol Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port. -
Page 126
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-52 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Baud Rate 19200 bits/s 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s or 38400 bits/s If RP1 Status = “EIA(RS)485” or “K bus OK”: This cell controls the communication speed between relay and master station. -
Page 127
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-53 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS Duration of time waited before an inactive tunnel to MiCOM S1 Agile is reset. Alarm, Event, None NIC Link Report… -
Page 128
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-54 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 SNTP Parameters SNTP Server 1 SNTP server 1 Address Time synchronization is supported using SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol); this protocol is used to synchronize the internal real time clock of the relays. This cell displays the IP address of the primary SNTP server. -
Page 129
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-55 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS REAR PORT2 (RP2) RP2 Inactivity Timer 15 mins. 1 mins. 30 mins. 1 min. This cell controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including resetting any password access that was enabled. -
Page 130
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-56 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings COMMISSION TESTS 0 to 2047 See P44x/EN PL section for Monitor Bit 1 Relay Label 01 details of digital data bus signals Monitor Bit 8… -
Page 131
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-57 Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings COMMISSION TESTS No operation / 3 pole test / Autoreclose test No Operation Pole A Test / Pole B test / pole C test Where the relay provides an auto-reclose function, this cell will be available for testing the sequence of circuit breaker trip and auto-reclose cycles with the settings applied. -
Page 132
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-58 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. Universal Inputs Characteristics Standard 60%-80% 50% — 70 % / Standard 60%-80% Controls the changement of state of opto isolated inputs, according to the nominal voltage value. -
Page 133
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-59 Menu Text Default Setting Available Setting CTRL I/P CONFIG. Control Input 2 to 32 Latched Latched, Pulsed Configures the control inputs as either ‘latched’ or ‘pulsed’. Ctrl Command Set/Reset, In/Out, Enabled/Disabled,… -
Page 134
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-60 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size INTERMICOM COMMS Rx Direct count Data Number of Permissive Tripping messages received with the correct message structure. Rx Block Count Data Number of Blocking messages received with the correct message structure. -
Page 135
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-61 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size INTERMICOM COMMS Loopback Mode Disabled Disabled / Internal / External By selecting “Loopback Mode” to “Internal”, only the internal software of the relay is checked whereas “External”… -
Page 136
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-62 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size INTERMICOM CONF Visible if “IM1 Fallback Mode” = “Default”. Sets the default value to assign to the command after a time period. -
Page 137
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-63 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. FUNCTION KEYS Fn. Key 2 to 10 Mode Toggled Toggled, Normal Sets the function key in toggle or normal mode (see “Fn. Key 1 mode”). -
Page 138
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-64 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.14 “IED configurator” column (P442 / P444 only) The contents of the IED CONFIGURATOR column (for IEC 61850 configuration) are mostly data cells, displayed for information but not editable. to edit the configuration, it is necessary to use the IED (Intelligent Electronic Device) configurator tool within MiCOM S1 Agile. -
Page 139
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-65 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. IED CONFIGURATOR GoEna 00000000 00000000 11111111 GoEna (GOose ENAble) is a setting to enable GOOSE (Generic Object Orientated Substation Event, for high-speed inter-device messaging) publisher settings. This setting enables (“1”) or disables (“0”) GOOSE control blocks from 08 (first digit) to 01 (last digit). -
Page 140
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-66 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. SUPERVISION – GROUP 1 Sets the sensitivity of the superimposed current elements. CT Supervision – Group 1 CTS Status Disabled Enabled / Disabled Enables or disables the Circuit Transformer Supervision. -
Page 141
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-67 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – SYSTEM CHECK C/S Check Scheme for Man Bit 0: Live Bus / Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus / Live Line, Bit 2: Live Bus / Live Line. -
Page 142
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-68 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – AUTORECLOSE 1P Trip Mode 1 – Single 1/3 – Single/Three 1/3/3 – Single/Three/Three 1/3/3/3 – Single/Three/Three/Three Number of shots, single pole trip mode (displayed if “A/R single pole” is enabled (‘CB Control’… -
Page 143
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-69 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size GROUP 1 – AUTORECLOSE C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Enabled Enabled, Disabled Check synchronism on 3-pole reclosure during Dead Time 1 Enables or disables the control by the check synchronism logic of the 3P high speed autoreclosure (HSAR) cycle during dead time 1 (check synchro 3P HSAR). -
Page 144
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-70 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.18 Security configuration (“SECURITY CONFIG” menu, if option avalable) The SECURITY CONFIG column contains the main configuration settings for Security functions. This column is used to set the password attempts number and duration. When these limits expire, access to the interface is blocked until timer has expired. -
Page 145
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-71 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Step Size Min. Max. Attempts Remain Data Indicates the number of attempts to enter a password. Blk Time Remain Data Indicates the blocking time remain (in minute). -
Page 146
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-72 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC DEFAULT SETTINGS The relay includes Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) — one PSL by Group of settings enabled (maximum 4 groups of PSL Logic can be assigned in the relay). -
Page 147
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-73 • Communication with the relay can be started (Device open connection address1 pword AAAA) and the PSL activated in the internal logic of the relay can be extracted, displayed, modified and uploaded again to the relay. -
Page 148
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-74 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Or “Custom” can be selected in the menu to set a different voltage pick-up for any opto inputs: The default mappings for each of the inputs are shown in section P44x/EN PL. -
Page 149
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-75 Relay Contact P442 Relay P444 Relay N° A/R Close [straight] A/R Close [straight] Power Swing Detected Power Swing Detected [straight] [straight] Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated… -
Page 150
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-76 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Input Output Pulse setting Pulse Timer Input Output Pulse setting Input Pick Up/ Output Tp setting Td setting Drop Off Timer Input Output Tp setting Td setting Input Output Timer setting… -
Page 151
Setting P44x/EN ST/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (ST) 4-77 Programmable LED output mapping The default mappings for each of the programmable LEDs are as shown in the following table: P442 Relay P444 Relay Any Trip A Any Trip A… -
Page 152
P44x/EN ST/Hb6 Setting (ST) 4-78 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS Two calculations must be performed – one for the three phase fault current at the zone 1 reach, and one for earth (ground) faults. The higher of the two calculated Vk voltages must… -
Page 153
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-1 APPLICATION NOTES Date: 2017… -
Page 154
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 155
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits MiCOM distance relay 1.2.1 Protection Features 1.2.2 Non-Protection Features 1.2.3 Additional Features for the P442 Relay Model 1.2.4 Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model… -
Page 156
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Channel Aided distance schemes 3.2.1 Standard Scheme 3.2.2 Trip Mode 3.2.3 Carrier send Zone (open scheme) 3.2.4 Distance Carrier Received (Dist CR) 3.2.5 Current reversal guard logic 3.2.6 Unblocking logic (permissive scheme) 3.2.7… -
Page 157
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-5 4.6.1 Setting guidelines 4.6.2 Setting example Directional and non-directional earth fault protection 4.7.1 Setting guidelines 4.7.2 Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) Aided Directional Earth Fault (DEF) 4.8.1 DEF Protection Against High Resistance Earth Faults 4.8.2… -
Page 158
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.8.1 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) – Main VT for minZ measurement 5.8.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) 5.8.3 Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVTS) Check synchronisation 5.9.1 Live Busbar and Dead Line 5.9.2… -
Page 159
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-7 INTRODUCTION Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits Overhead lines are amongst the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them provide secure and reliable operation. -
Page 160
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 element can be used for SOFT/TOR logic. The fourth element can be configured for stub bus protection in 1½ circuit breaker arrangements. • 50N/51N: Instantaneous and time-delayed neutral overcurrent protection. Four elements are available. -
Page 161
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-9 • Fault/Event/Disturbance Records — Available from the serial communications or on the relay display (fault and event records only). • Distance to fault locator — Reading in km, miles or % of line length. -
Page 162
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.2.4 Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model • Single pole tripping and autoreclose. • Real Time Clock Synchronisation — Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option). -
Page 163
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-11 DISTANCE ALGORITHMS The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: • «Delta» algorithms, also called High Speed algorithms, using the superimposed current and voltage values that are characteristic of a fault. These are used for phase selection and directional determination. -
Page 164
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D fault distance and R fault resistance). The line model used is the 3×3 matrix of the symmetrical line impedances (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases. -
Page 165
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-13 2.1.1 Phase-to-earth loop impedance / (1+k X / Phase Fault Fault R / Phase Fault Location of Distance Relay P3031ENa Figure 2: Phase-to-earth loop impedance The impedance model for the phase-to-earth loop is: VαN = Z1 x Dfault x (Iα… -
Page 166
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ) + R α N α fault fault fault − .3 0 α N α fault fault fault − − = (R +j.X ) + R α N α… -
Page 167
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-15 The impedance model for the phase-to-phase loop is: αβ αβ = ZL x Dfault x I + Rfault /2 x Ifault αβ with = phase AB, BC or CA αβ… -
Page 168
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Phase selection As the superimposed values no longer include the load currents, it is possible to make high- speed phase selection. 2.2.1 Fault Modelling Consider a stable network status-the steady-state load flow prior to any start. When a fault occurs, a new network is established. -
Page 169
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-17 • Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (48 samples per cycle at 50 or 60 Hz). No fault is detected: • all nominal phase voltages are between 70% and 130% of the nominal value. -
Page 170
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Example: isolated AC fault… -
Page 171
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-19… -
Page 172
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 2.2.3 Confirmation To eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of three sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop for which the two following conditions are met: •… -
Page 173
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-21 S >5 x (10% x Vn x 20% x In x cos (85°) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. the RCA angle of the delta algorithms is equal to 60° (-30°) if the protected line is not serie compensated (otherwise RCA is equal to 0°). -
Page 174
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Confirmation Phase selection Start Directional decision P3036ENa Figure 7: Deltas algorithms High speed algorithms are used only during the first 2 cycles following a fault detection. «Conventional» Algorithms These algorithms do not use the superimposed values but use the impedance values measured under fault conditions. -
Page 175
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-23 2.3.1 Convergence Analysis This analysis is based on the measurements of distance and resistance of the fault. These measurements are taken on each phase-ground and phase-phase loops (18 loops in total). -
Page 176
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 2.3.3 Phase Selection If the fault currents are high enough with respect to the maximum load currents current- based phase selection is used; if not, impedance-based phase selection is required. -
Page 177
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-25 Following are the different phase selections: • S = T x R single-phase A to earth fault • S = T x R single-phase B to earth fault • SCN = T x RCN x single-phase C to earth fault •… -
Page 178
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Single-phase fault The reference voltage is stored in memory when the fault appears. When the fault is eliminated by single-phase tripping, the high-speed single-phase auto-reclose (HSAR) is started. If a fault appears less than three cycles after the AR starts, the stored voltage value remains valid as the reference and is used to calculate direction. -
Page 179
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-27 Figure 9: Phase-to-earth loop impedance Tripping Logic 2.5.1 General Three tripping modes can be selected (‘Distance SchemeTrip Mode’ setting): Single-pole trip at T1 (if “1P. Z1 & CR” is set): Single-pole trip for fault in zone 1 at T1 and channel-aided trip at T1. -
Page 180
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-28 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 DEF Trip A, DEF Trip B and DEF Trip C (Directional Earth fault section), User Trip A, User Trip B and User Trip C (trip logic), External Trip A, External Trip B and External trip C (PSL) •… -
Page 181
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-29 Fault Locator The relay has an integral fault locator that uses information from the current and voltage inputs to provide a distance-to-fault measurement. The fault locator measures the distance by applying the same distance calculation principle as that used for the fault-clearing, distance-measurement algorithm. -
Page 182
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-30 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The calculation for phase-to-phase loop is based on the following equation: – I ) + (L – L + (L – L + (L – L fault fault fault… -
Page 183
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-31 mutual coupling may be large, and either must be factored into the settings, or accommodated by measurement of the parallel, mutually-coupled lines residual (earth) current, where zero-sequence current information is available. The value of the residual currents from parallel lines is then integrated into the distance measurement equation. -
Page 184
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-32 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Reverse Forward Weak Strong Source Source Forward Forward All breakers closed Relay 3 senses reverse current Forward Reverse Strong Weak Source Source Forward Breaker 1 opens Relay 3 senses forward current… -
Page 185
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-33 DISTANCE PROTECTION AND DISTANCE SCHEME FUNCTIONS The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. The following section details the individual distance protection functions, in addition to where they may be applied. -
Page 186
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-34 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Fault distance characteristics (“Distance elements” menu setting) This section explains in detail the “Distance elements” menu setting. This menu is used to set the line protection. The following sections contain line and zone setting application. A general example of setting (distance elements and schemes) is presented in section 3.4. -
Page 187
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-35 3.1.2.1 Zone setting – Zone Status The P442 and P444 relays have 6 zones of phase or earth fault protection, as shown in the impedance plots below. The fault protections are completed by a tilt characteristic (tilt angle). -
Page 188
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-36 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 16: Phase/ground fault quadrilateral characteristics (Ω/phase scheme) Ω Note: In a /phase scheme, R must be divided by 1+K (for a phase/ground diagram The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the 2Z… -
Page 189
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-37 • The zone 3 elements would usually be used to provide overall back-up protection for adjacent circuits. The zone 3 reach (Z3) is therefore set to approximately 120% of the combined impedance of the protected line plus the longest adjacent line. -
Page 190
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-38 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Z1 Extension (A) Z1 Extension (B) P3052ENa Figure 17: Zone 1 extension scheme Z1 < Z1X < Z2 Z1 < Z2 < Z1X (with Z1 < ZL < Z1X) In this scheme, zone 1X is enabled and set to overreach the protected line. -
Page 191
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-39 which the residual compensation factor kZ1 is set to a lower value than normal (typically ≤ 80% of normal kZ1). Z1 G/F (Optional) Z1 G/F (Normal) Z MO P3048EN… -
Page 192
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-40 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Z2 ‘ Boost ‘ G/F Z2 PH (i) Group 1 Z2 ‘ Reduced ‘ G/F Z2 PH (ii) Group 2 P3049EN Figure 19: Mutual Coupling example — zone 2 reach considerations 3.1.2.2… -
Page 193
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-41 On a line or on a cable, Z2 = Z1. It results: VA = Z1 (I1 + I2) + Z0I0 We can write also: IA = I1 + I2 + I0 (I1 + I2) = IA –… -
Page 194
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-42 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 right hand and left hand resistive reach constraints of each zone are displaced by +RPh and -RPh either side of the characteristic impedance of the line, respectively. RPh is generally set on a per zone basis, using R1Ph, R2Ph, RpPh and RqPh. -
Page 195
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-43 Zone 3 R3PG-R4PG LOAD Zone 4 P0475ENa Figure 20: Resistive reaches for load avoidance As shown in the Figure, R3Ph-R4Ph is set such as to avoid point Z by a suitable margin. -
Page 196
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-44 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 [(R3G – R4G) – ∆R] ≤ 80% Z min load ∆R = 0,032 x ∆f x R load min With ∆f: power swing frequency R load min: minimum load resistance A typical resistive reach coverage would be 40 Ω… -
Page 197
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-45 residual current on the parallel line is measured. It is extremely important that the polarity of connection for the mutual CT input is correct, as shown. The system assumed for the distance protection worked example will be used here, refer to section 3.3. -
Page 198
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-46 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Channel Aided distance schemes The following diagram gives the logic of the distance protection: Figure 21: Channel aided distance scheme in the distance protection diagram This section details the “Channel Aided Distance schem” path. -
Page 199
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-47 provide main protection for the line or cable as shown in Figure 22 below, with zone 3 reaching further to provide back up protection for faults on adjacent circuits. -
Page 200
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-48 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 will still result in time delayed tripping. Where high speed protection is required over the entire line, then a channel aided scheme will have to be employed. 3.2.1.2 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes PUP Z2 and PUP Fwd To provide fast fault clearance for all faults, both transient and permanent, along the length of the protected circuit, it is necessary to use a signal aided tripping scheme. -
Page 201
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-49 Figure 25: PUP Z2 permissive underreach scheme Trip logic: Carrier User IEC Standard Trip Logic Application Send setting Z2.CR.’Aid Dist Delay’ + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 448.15.13 PUR or AUP… -
Page 202
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-50 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 26: PUP fwd permissive underreach scheme Key: Forward fault detection (DDB: ‘Dist Fwd’ or ‘DEF Fwd’); <Z Underimpedance Started: Z2 or Z3. Trip logic: Carrier User IEC Standard… -
Page 203
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-51 The signaling channel is keyed from operation of zone 2 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 2, then it will operate with Transmission Time (‘Distance schemes / Aid Dist Delay’) delay on reception of the permissive signal. -
Page 204
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-52 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 as a reverse fault detector. This is used in the current reversal logic and in the optional weak infeed echo feature. Note: Should the signalling channel fail, the fastest tripping in the Basic scheme will be subject to the tZ2 time delay. -
Page 205
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-53 Trip logic: Carrier User IEC Standard Trip Logic Application Send setting Z1.CR.’Aid Dist Delay’ + Z1.T2 + Z2.T2 448.15.16 POR1 or POP or POTT Z1 > ZL POP Z1 + Z3.T3… -
Page 206
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-54 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 P3065ENa Figure 31: Main protection in the BOP Z1 scheme Figure 32: Logic diagram for the BOP Z1 scheme Trip logic: Carrier User IEC Standard Trip Logic Application Send setting Z1. -
Page 207
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-55 Figure 33: Main protection in the BOP Z2 scheme Figure 34: Logic diagram for the BOP Z2 scheme Trip logic: Carrier User IEC Standard Trip Logic Application Send setting Z2. -
Page 208
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-56 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.2.2 Trip Mode The tripping mode is settable using the three following modes: • Force 3 Poles: three-pole trip (in all cases) • 1 Pole Z1 & CR: single pole trip at T1 when a fault is detected in zone 1 (Z1) or at CR (Carrier Receive) reception. -
Page 209
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-57 • CsZ1, CsZ2 and CsZ4 = Carrier send for zone 1, zone 2 or zone 4, • Reverse’ = Reverse Fault detected, • Z1 to Z4 = Zone 1 to 4 decision (blocked by Power swing or Reversal guard), •… -
Page 210
Application Notes (AP) 5-58 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 at substation D (circuit breaker D, Figure 36). The reset of the current reversal guard timer is initiated when the reverse looking Zone 4 resets. A time delay tREVERSAL GUARD is required in case the overreaching trip element at end D operates before the signal sent from the relay at end C has reset. -
Page 211
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-59 ‘DIST. UNB CR’ = ‘DIST. Chan Recv’ (CR unblocked when “distance carrier received” is present), ‘DEF. UNB CR’ = ‘DEF. Chan Recv’ (DEF CR unblocked when “DEF carrier received” is present). -
Page 212
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-60 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ‘DIST. Chan Recv’ ‘DIST. COS’ ‘DIST. UNB CR’ ‘COS alarm’ ‘DEF. Chan Recv’ ‘DEF. COS’ ‘DEF. UNB CR’ 1 (Window) 1 (delayed) 1 (delayed) 3.2.6.3 Loss of Carrier In this mode the signalling equipment used is such that a carrier/data messages are continuously transmitted across the channel, when in service. -
Page 213
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-61 Note: For DEF the logic used will depend upon which settings are enabled: • Same channel (shared) In this case, the DEF channel is the Main Distance channel signal (the scheme & contacts of carrier received will be identical) •… -
Page 214
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-62 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 39: SOTF-TOR activation logic TOR Enable logic is activated in 2 cases: 1. When the internal autorecloser is enabled or when the reclaim signal from an external autorecloser is connected to a logic input (opto input): As soon as the reclaim time starts, the “TOR Enable”… -
Page 215
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-63 Trip Reclosing Any Pole Dead 500 ms 200 ms TOR Enabl e P0532ENa • The SOTF protection is enabled when the circuit breaker has been open 3 pole for longer than 110 s. -
Page 216
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-64 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.2.7.3 TOR-SOTF Trip Logic During the TOR-SOTF 500 ms window, individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled using the TOR-SOTF Mode (‘Distance schemes’ menu) function links (TOR logic Bit0 to Bit4 &… -
Page 217
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-65 TOR Trip logic results Type of Fault Fault in Zp Fault in Zp (Zq) (Zq) TOR selected Logic Fault in Z1 Fault in Z2 forward reverse Fault in Z3 Fault in Z4… -
Page 218
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-66 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 After the 500 ms TOR-SOTF time windows has ended, the I>3 overcurrent element remains in service with a trip time delay equal to the setting ‘Group 1/Back-up I>/I>3 Time Delay’. -
Page 219
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-67 Figure 42: Switch on to fault and trip on reclose logic diagram 3.2.8 Zone 1 Ext. on Channel Fail See section 3.1. 3.2.9 Permissive Overreach Schemes Weak Infeed (WI) Features Weak Infeed (WI) logic can be enabled to run in parallel with all the permissive schemes. -
Page 220
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-68 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Note: The 2 modes are blocked during Fuse failure conditions. 3.2.9.1 Weak Infeed Activation Figure 43: Weak Infeed mode activation logic 3.2.9.2 Weak Infeed Echo For permissive schemes, a signal would only be sent if the required signal send zone were to detect a fault. -
Page 221
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-69 Figure 45: Weak infeed phase selection logic DDB: ‘DIST. UNB CR’ (or ‘DEF. UNB CR’) is used as a filter to avoid a permanent phase selection which could be maintained if CBaux signals are not mapped in the PSL (when line is opened). -
Page 222
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-70 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 47: Weak infeed trip logic 3.2.10 Loss of Load (LoL) 3.2.11 Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL) The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phases. -
Page 223
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-71 LOL-A LOL-B & LOL-C 18ms & Trip & 40ms P3053ENa Figure 48: Loss-of-load accelerated trip scheme For circuits with load tapped off the protected line, care must be taken in setting the loss of load feature to ensure that the I<… -
Page 224
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-72 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Tiger Bay Green valley Blue River Rocky bay 80 Km 100 Km 60 Km System Data Green Valley — Blue River transmission line System voltage 230kv System grounding solid… -
Page 225
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-73 = 4.64 / 79.4° Ω secondary. = 100 x 0.484 / 79.4° + 50% x 60 x 0.484 / 79.4° The Line Angle = 80°. Therefore actual Zone 1 reach, Z1 = 4.64 / 80° Ω secondary. -
Page 226
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-74 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 kZ0 kZ0 Res. Comp, ) / 3.Z Ie: As a ratio. ∠kZ0 ∠ (Z kZ0 Angle, ) / 3.Z Set in degrees. (0.426 + j1.576) — (0.089 + j0.476) 0.337 + j1.1… -
Page 227
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-75 Where: ∆R width of the power swing detection band ∆f power swing frequency (f – f Rlim resistive reach of the starting characteristic (=R3ph-R4ph) network impedance corresponding to the sum of the reverse (Z4) and… -
Page 228
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-76 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay A will underreach for faults beyond the tee-point with infeed from terminal C. When terminal C is a relatively strong source, the underreaching effect can be substantial. For a zone 2 element set to 120% of the protected line, this effect may result in non-operation of the element for internal faults. -
Page 229
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-77 Figure 51 (i) shows the case where a short tee is connected close to another terminal. In this case, zone 1 elements set to 80% of the shortest relative feeder length do not overlap. This leaves a section not covered by any zone 1 element. -
Page 230
Application Notes (AP) 5-78 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The major disadvantage of blocking schemes is highlighted in Figure 51 (iii) where fault current is outfeed from a terminal for an internal fault condition. relay ‘C’ sees a reverse fault condition. -
Page 231
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-79 Figure 53: logic of the distance protection by zones Where: Unblock PS Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Zp or Zq: Unblocking of Zone 1 (Z1), Z2, Z3, Z4, Zp or Zq during a power swing (‘Power swing / Blocking zone’… -
Page 232
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-80 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.5.1.2 Unblocking / blocking logic with power swing or reversal guard For double circuit lines, the fault current direction can change in one circuit when circuit breakers open sequentially to clear the fault on the parallel circuit. The change in current direction causes the overreaching distance elements to see the fault in the opposite direction to the direction in which the fault was initially detected. -
Page 233
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-81 Figure 55: Current reversal in double circuit lines zones blocking / unblocking with power swing or reversal guard During the reversal guard logic (in the case of parallel lines with overreaching teleprotection scheme — Z1x>ZL), the reverse direction decision is latched (until that timer is elapsed) from… -
Page 234
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-82 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.5.1.3 Zone 1 extended The following trip logic represents the zone 1 extended logic: Figure 56: Zone 1 extended (Z1X) trip logic Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic –… -
Page 235
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-83 Figure 57: Loss of load trip logic Where: Description Underreach scheme: Z1 < ZL: Permissive PZ1, PZ2, PFwd, None underreach Z1, Z2 or forward None: no distance scheme (basic scheme) Z1<ZL… -
Page 236
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-84 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.5.3 Trip logic and Zone 1 extension logic The following trip logic completes the distance protection by zone: Figure 58: Trip and Z1X trip logic Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic –… -
Page 237
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-85 2. The inputs Z1X must be polarised for activating Z1X the logic. 3 For the 1P – 3P trip logic check in the Tripping logic section. Accronyms used in the previous equation: •… -
Page 238
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-86 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Power Swing detection and blocking (PSB) Power swings are caused by a lack of stability in the network with sudden load fluctuations. A power swing may cause the two sources connected by the protected line to go out of step (loss of synchronism) with each other. -
Page 239
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-87 • The three impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5ms. • At least two poles of the breaker are closed (impedance measurement possible on two phases). -
Page 240
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-88 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 For instance: If Delta R and DeltaX selected are around 1 ohm (Delta X=1ohm, Delta R=2 ohms as it is the full loop), From section 3.4.1.12 Power Swing Band: ∆R = 0.032 ×… -
Page 241
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-89 locations on the power system can be designed as split points, where circuit breakers will trip 3 phase in to stabilize. Power swing blocking is automatically removed after “unblocking delay”. -
Page 242
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-90 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 4.1.6 What loop is faulty? The delta quantity calculated by delta exaggerated algorithm is used to determine which loop is chosen. The identified faulty loop will lead to a trip in case of the power swing blocking is unblocked. -
Page 243
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-91 Figure 61: Power swing detection & unblocking logic… -
Page 244
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-92 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Load blinding (load avoidance) Load blinders are provided for both phase and ground fault distance elements, to prevent misoperation (mal-tripping) for heavy load flow. The purpose is to configure a blinder envelope which surrounds the expected worst case load limits, and to block tripping for any impedance measured within the blinded region. -
Page 245
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-93 The start-up of the high-speed algorithms are confirmed Under such circumstances, the low voltage could not be explained by normal voltage excursion tolerances on-load. A fault is definitely present on the phase in question, and it is acceptable to override the blinder action and allow the distance zones to trip according to the entire zone shape. -
Page 246
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-94 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection 4.3.1 Inverse time characteristics The inverse time-delay characteristics listed above comply with the following formula: t = T × … -
Page 247
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-95 The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET. Note that these cells are not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting. -
Page 248
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-96 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 I phase I 1> Trip I 2> No trip tI1> tI2> P0483ENa Figure 65: Tripping logic for phase overcurrent protection I>3 Highset Overcurrent and Switch on to Fault Protection The I>3 overcurrent element of the P442 and P444 relays can be Enabled as an… -
Page 249
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-97 I>4 Element: Stub Bus Protection Busbar 1 V = 0 Protection’s blocking using VTs I > 0 Open isolator Stub Bus Protection : I >4 Stub Bus Protection : I >4… -
Page 250
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-98 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • Earth fault elements • Broken conductor elements • Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements 4.4.2 Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. -
Page 251
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-99 Selective fault clearance of the protection for forward faults is provided by the power measurement combined with a time-delay inversely proportional to the measured power. This protection function does not issue any trip command for reverse faults. -
Page 252
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-100 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Another type of unbalanced fault which can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. -
Page 253
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-101 4.6.2 Setting example The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning: • I = 1000A full load • I = 100A therefore the quiescent I2/I1 ratio is given by: •… -
Page 254
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-102 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 CTS Block SBEF Start SBEF Overcurrent SBEF Trip IDMT/DT SBEF Trip SBEF Timer Block P0484ENa Figure 71: Logic without directionality CTS Block SBEF SBEF Start Overcurrent Slow VTS Directional… -
Page 255
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-103 • When protecting solidly-earthed transmission systems, a -60° RCA setting should be set. 4.7.2.2 Application of Negative Sequence Polarising In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. -
Page 256
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-104 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 4.8.1.3 Phase selection The phase is selected in the same way as for distance protection except that the current threshold is reduced (I ≥ 0.05 x In and V ≥ 0.1 x Vn) -
Page 257
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-105 Forward Startup Vr>threshold Ied threshold & & & Forward decision Reverse decision t-trans Carrier Received DE F & Blocking DEF & Single Phase T rip Single phase selection Iev threshold… -
Page 258
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-106 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 76: PSL required to activate DEF logic with an independant channel Figure 77: PSL required to activate DEF logic with shared channel Directionnal Negative DEF Fwd Polarisation Calculation… -
Page 259
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-107 -14° P0491EN Figure 79: Characteristic angle for aided DEF protection 4.8.3.2 Aided DEF Schemes 4.8.3.2.1 Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme Figure 80: Independent channel – permissive scheme Figure 81: Shared channel – permissive scheme Figure 82 shows the element reaches. -
Page 260
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-108 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 IN> Fwd (A) IN> Fwd (B) P3070EN Figure 82: The DEF permissive scheme The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. -
Page 261
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-109 Figure 84: Shared channel – blocking scheme Send logic: DEF Reverse Trip logic: IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay. IN> Fwd (A) IN> Rev (A) IN>… -
Page 262
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-110 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 86: Logic diagram for the DEF blocking scheme The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. -
Page 263
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-111 4.9.1 Time constant characteristic 4.9.1.1 Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: – Ι… -
Page 264
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-112 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 τ1 (minutes) τ2 (minutes) Limits Oil-filled transformer Rating 400 — 1600 kVA The thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information. -
Page 265
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-113 Figure 87: Residual voltage, solidly earthed system As can be seen in the previous figure, the residual voltage measured by a relay for an earth fault on a solidly earthed system is solely depending on the ratio of source impedance behind the relay to line impedance in front of the relay, up to the point of fault. -
Page 266
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-114 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 88: Residual voltage, resistance earthed system As shown in the figure above, a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance. -
Page 267
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-115 4.12 Voltage protection Voltage protection contains undervoltage and overvoltage protection. Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: •… -
Page 268
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-116 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 capacity of the generators in that particular subsystem. Industrial plants that are dependent on utilities to supply part of their loads will experience underfrequency conditions when the incoming lines are lost. -
Page 269
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-117 CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed. -
Page 270
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-118 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Initiation CB fail timer reset mechanism (Menu selectable) External protection — Three options are available. The user can select any or all of the options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [External trip reset] AND [All I<… -
Page 271
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-119 circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a back-trip may be issued following an additional time delay. The back- trip uses ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’, which is also started at the instant of the initial protection… -
Page 272
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-120 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Pole Live Pole Dead I< I< P0553ENa Figure 90: Algorithm for pole dead detection Description of the open pole detection algorithm: Each half cycle after the current crosses zero, the algorithm detects whether the current is higher than the I<… -
Page 273
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-121 NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Circuit breaker condition monitoring Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. -
Page 274
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-122 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.1.2.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Therefore, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. -
Page 275
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-123 5.1.2.7 Logic diagram… -
Page 276
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-124 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Circuit Breaker Control The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker: • Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu • Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs •… -
Page 277
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-125 closure according to system check logic. If the system check criteria are not satisfied before that time-delay elapses, the relay will lockout and issue alarm. In addition, a CB Healthy information (from the CB), connected to one of the relay’s opto- isolators, will indicate the circuit breaker condition for closing availability. -
Page 278
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-126 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.2.1 Logic Inputs / outputs used by the CB Control logic The following DDB are available for CB Control logic (see section P44x/EN PL): • Inputs: Man. Trip CB … -
Page 279
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-127 5.2.1.1 General CB Control logic Figure 94: General circuit breaker control logic CT and VT ratio For each Terminal (connected to the secondary of a High voltage CT), the following values have to be known. -
Page 280
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-128 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.3.2 VT Ratios Only 2 values have to be known and entered: 1. Phase VT Primary current (from 100 to 100 kV) given by the manufacturer. 2. Phase VT secondary current (80 or 140 V) given by the manufacturer. -
Page 281
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-129 5.5.2 Control I/P Configuration The “CTRL I/P CONFIG” column has several functions one of which allows the user to configure the control inputs as either ‘latched’ or ‘pulsed’. A latched control input will remain in the set state until a reset command is given, either by the menu or the serial communications. -
Page 282
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-130 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 channel isn’t seen as being a valid signal. In other words, an intertripping channel must be very secure. Permissive In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. -
Page 283
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-131 5.6.1.4 General Features & Implementation InterMiCOM provides 8 commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the “IM# Cmd Type” cell. -
Page 284
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-132 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 “Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. Not used Not used Table 11: InterMICOM D9 port pin-out connections Depending on whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below. -
Page 285
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-133 5.6.2 Functional Assignment Even though settings are made on the relay to control the mode of the intertrip signals, it is necessary to assign interMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) if InterMiCOM is to be successfully implemented. -
Page 286
Application Notes (AP) 5-134 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a minimum “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting i.e. whenever a non- valid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. -
Page 287
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-135 Figure 98: Connections for external loopback mode Once the relay is switched into either of the Loopback modes, a test pattern can be entered in the “Test Pattern” cell which is then transmitted through the software and/or hardware. -
Page 288
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-136 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 specifically provided to allow the locking of a function key therefore preventing further activation of the key on consequent key presses. This allows function keys that are set to ‘Toggled’… -
Page 289
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-137 5.8.1 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) – Main VT for minZ measurement 5.8.1.1 VTS description The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the analog ac voltage inputs to the relay. -
Page 290
Application Notes (AP) 5-138 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of I0 and/or I2 current. Also, VTS operation is blocked (and distance element unblocked) when any phase current exceeds 2.5 ×… -
Page 291
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-139 Figure 100: Line energisation – superimposed current under fault condition (VT isolated) The phase voltage level detector is settable (’Threshold 3P’ setting)). The sensitivity of the superimposed current – ‘delta I>’– elements is settable and default value is set to 0.1In. -
Page 292
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-140 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • NOT I>: The direct current is higher than a fixed threshold equal to 2,5In. • V<: All the voltages are lower than a V< threshold. • NOT ∆Ι>: The line currents’ variation are higher than “Delta I” value. -
Page 293
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-141 Healthy Network = U AND V AND I AND CVMR AND PSWING 5.8.1.5 INPUT / OUTPUT DDBs used in the PSL: The following DDBs are associated to VTS in the PSL (see section P44x/EN PL) Inputs: •… -
Page 294
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-142 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The residual voltage setting, CTS VN< Inhibit and the residual current setting, CTS IN> set, should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example CTS VN< Inhibit should be set to 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The CTS IN>… -
Page 295
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-143 close signal is applied into the logic as a pulse to ensure that an operator cannot simply keep the close signal applied and wait for the system to come into synchronism. This is often referred to as guard logic and requires the close signal to be released and then re-applied if the closure is unsuccessful. -
Page 296
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-144 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.9.2 Dead Busbar and Live Line If there is a circuit breaker and busbar at the remote end of the radial feeder mentioned above, the remote breaker might be reclosed for a dead busbar / live line condition. -
Page 297
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-145 sample sample P0493ENa Figure 104: Frequency calculation Frequency tracking is calculated by: freq=1/((X + Nb )* T samples samples With X – b ) et X – I is the sampling period. -
Page 298
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-146 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Trailing VLine phase VLine VBus Leading VLine phase VBus VLine P0494ENa Figure 105: Calculation of Diff. phase Phase shift = (∆T/ T) *360 ∆T = Ta + (x1-y2) A phase shift calculation requires a change of sign of both signals. -
Page 299
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-147 5.9.5 DDBs from Check Synchronism function used in the PSL The following DDBs are associated with the the check synchronization logic in the PSL (see P44x/EN PL). Logic inputs used by the check synchronism logic: •… -
Page 300
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-148 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Logic Diagram: Figure 107: Check sync logic description… -
Page 301
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-149 Output assigned Check Sync SYNC AR_Force_Sync AR_Fail AReclose AR_Close AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P Closing command with check sync & conditions verified CB Control CBC_Recl_3P CBC_No_Check_Sync P0495ENa Figure 108: Internal check synchronism and internal autoreclose logic… -
Page 302
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-150 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.10 Autorecloser The relay autorecloser provides selectable multishot reclosure of the line circuit breaker. The standard scheme logic is configured to permit control of one circuit breaker. Autoreclosure of two circuit breakers in a 1½… -
Page 303
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-151 Figure 111: Autoreclose timing diagram Should autoreclosure not be required, the function may be Disabled in the relay Configuration menu. Disabling the autorecloser does not prevent the use of the internal check synchronism element to supervise manual circuit breaker closing. -
Page 304
Application Notes (AP) 5-152 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 If protection operates during the reclaim time, after the final reclose attempt, the relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset. -
Page 305
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-153 • If the first fault is a single phase fault, a single pole autoreclose sequence will start, • If the first fault is a multi phase fault, the first autoreclose sequence a three pole autoreclose sequence will start. -
Page 306
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-154 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • CB Opening + Reset time (Trip coil energised → Trip mechanism reset): 200ms (b); • Protection reset time: < 80ms (c); • CB Closing time (Close command → Contacts make): 85ms (d). -
Page 307
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-155 Figure 115: Fault during an autoreclose cycle during (discrimination Time-delay has not expired) If the autoreclose logic detects a 3-pole trip (internal or external) on expiry of the discrimination time-delay, and during the 1P dead time; the single pole autoreclose cycle is stopped and the relay trips 3-pole and blocks the autorecloser (see Figure 116). -
Page 308
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-156 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 117: Autoreclose inhibit window Figure 118: Autoreclose inhibit window logic The inhibit time-delay is started at the end of dead time if CB healthy is absent 5.10.1.6 Check synchronism on 3-pole reclosure The Check synchronism on 3-pole reclosure (‘C/S on 3P Rcl DT1’) setting is used to… -
Page 309
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-157 When autoreclosure is not required for multiphase faults, DDB signals ‘2Ph Fault’ and ‘3Ph Fault’ can be mapped via the PSL in a logic OR combination onto input DDB: ‘BAR’ (Block internal AutoReclose, section 5.9.1.5). -
Page 310
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-158 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • When “autoreclose Lockout / Block A/R” is enabled, the autoreclose does not initiate any additional A/R cycle. If the autorecloser locks out during a cycle, ‘A/R close’ is blocked. -
Page 311
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-159 5.10.2 Logic Inputs / outputs used by the Autoreclose logic 5.10.2.1 Logic inputs used by the Autoreclose logic Contacts from external equipment (External protection or external Check Synchronism or external Autoreclose) may be used to influence the autorecloser via opto-isolated inputs. -
Page 312
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-160 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • A/R Trip 3 P, • AR 3P In Prog., • AR Discrim, • AR Lockout Shot>, • Check Sync;OK • Control Close • Control Trip • Ctrl Cls In Prog •… -
Page 313
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-161 Forces the Check Sync conditions to the high logic level – used for SPAR or TPAR with SYNC AR3 fast (Enabled using setting) – The signal is reset with AR reclaim In the next diagram, A/R lockout logic picks up by •… -
Page 314
Application Notes (AP) 5-162 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The CB healthy logic is used as a negative logic (due to an inverter in the scheme – see Figure 118 inhibit window logic) but the DDB considers CB healthy as a positive logic… -
Page 315
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-163 Figure 129: AR logic for 3p trip decision Further autoreclose cycles (cycles 2, 3 and 4) in progress (AR 234 In Prog) logic: Figure 130: Output dealayed autoreclose (for dead time 2, 3, 4) If it is assigned to an opto input in the PSL and energised, The DDB: ‘Force 3P Trip’ signal will force the internal single-phase protection to trip three-poles. -
Page 316
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-164 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 None 52A (1 or 3 opto inputs for a single pole logic) 52B (1 or 3 opto inputs) Both 52A and 52B (2 opto inputs or 6 opto inputs) -
Page 317
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-165 Sol6: Six opto inputs used for 52a &52b (1-pole cicuit breaker) Figure 133: Different opto inputs / CB aux schemes (cont’d) Where ‘None’ is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, auto-reclose, etc. -
Page 318
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-166 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1 – Coherence of 52-A/52-B long enough to raise the alarm 2 – Discrepancy of 52-A/52-B too brief to raise the alarm 3 – Pole dead logic With one opto input 52A 3 –… -
Page 319
Application Notes P44x/EN AP/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (AP) 5-167 • CB Discrepancy: Used for internal CBA Disc issued by external (opto input) or internal detection (CB Aux) 5.11.2.2 Outputs • CB Status Alarm Picks up when CB Discrepancy status is detected after CBA timer issued externally by opto or internally by CB Aux •… -
Page 320
P44x/EN AP/Hb6 Application Notes (AP) 5-168 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 • CBA_3P = All pole Dead • CBA_3P_C = All poles Live • ‘Any Pole Dead’= Minimum 1 Pole dead The total number of autoreclosures is shown in the “CB Condition” LCD menu under Total Reclosures. -
Page 321
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC Date: 2017… -
Page 322
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-2 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 323
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-3 CONTENTS PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC (PSL) Description of P442 and P444 Logic Nodes 1.1.1 Sorted by DDB number 1.1.2 Sorted by name Factory default programmable scheme logic 1.2.1 Logic input mapping 1.2.2 Relay output contact mapping 1.2.3… -
Page 324
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-4 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 325
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-5 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC (PSL) The Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) is a module of programmable logic gates and timers in the IED, which can be used to create customised internal logic. This is done by combining the IED’s digital inputs with internally generated digital signals using logic gates and timers, then mapping the resultant signals to the IED’s digital outputs and LEDs. -
Page 326
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source CT Fail Alarm Current transformers supervision indication: Indicates a PSL (OUT) CT Fail detected after time delay has elapsed is issued Supervision PSL (OUT) CB Fail Alarm Circuit breaker failure on any trip Breaker Fail… -
Page 327
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-7 Ordinal English Text Description Source AR Lockout Shot> Autoreclose lockout following final programmed attempt: PSL (OUT) Indicates a failed autoreclose (definitive trip following the Autorecloser last reclosing shot). The relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition has been reset. -
Page 328
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-8 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source V3< Alarm Third undervoltage stage Alarm PSL(IN) V4< Alarm Fourth undervoltage stage Alarm PSL(IN) V3> Alarm Third overvoltage stage Alarm PSL(IN) V4> Alarm Fourth overvoltage stage Alarm PSL(IN) 217 to Unused… -
Page 329
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-9 Ordinal English Text Description Source A/R Reclaim Internal autoreclose reclaim in progress (reclaim time PSL (OUT) timeout in progress). Autorecloser If it is assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energised, the DDB:‘A/R Reclaim’… -
Page 330
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-10 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source A/R TPAR Enable Three pole autorecloser (TPAR) activated: If it is PSL (OUT) assigned to an opto input in the PSL (by default, the PSL Autorecloser is inverted and linked to opto
and energized, the DDB:’A/R TPAR Enable’ will enable the 3-pole… -
Page 331
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-11 Ordinal English Text Description Source Check Synch. OK If linked to an opto input in a dedicated PSL and PSL (OUT) energised, it indicates that external synchronism Synchro conditions are met – This can be linked afterwards to an Check internal autoreclose logic V<… -
Page 332
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-12 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source DIST Start C Distance protection started on phase C PSL (OUT) Set to 0: Reset of (R, X) (resistance, reactance) Distance calculation made by All pole Dead detection: –… -
Page 333
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-13 Ordinal English Text Description Source DEF Sig. Send DEF protection schemes — Signal Send PSL (OUT) (Default PSL: Relay 05) Aided DEF Unblocking DEF channel PSL (OUT) DEF UNB CR internal Carrier Received signal (main Directional Earth Unblocking Fault unblocking signal) received. -
Page 334
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-14 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source V>1 Start Overvoltage function 1 stage start for any phase PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) V>2 Start Overvoltage function 2 stage start for any phase Overvoltage V>1 Trip Overvoltage 1… -
Page 335
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-15 Ordinal English Text Description Source TOR Enable Trip On Reclose enable: indicates the TOR logic is PSL (OUT) activated in the relay Set to 1= 500 ms pulse initiated by: ‘I A/R Reclaim’ (internal) OR ‘A/R reclaim’ (External Input) OR Any pole open for more than 200 ms… -
Page 336
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-16 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source Control Close Control close command from user (by internal CB PSL (OUT) control) CB control Instantaneous unconfirmed fuse failure internal PSL (OUT) VTS Fast detection. -
Page 337
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-17 Ordinal English Text Description Source Out Of Step Conf Out of Step Confirmed (number of cycles reached) PSL (OUT) S. Swing Conf Stable Swing confirmed (number of cycles reached) PSL (OUT) Dist Start N Start of distance protection for phase to ground fault… -
Page 338
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-18 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source V<3 Start Undervoltage stage 3 start V<4 Start Undervoltage stage 4 start V<3 Start A Undervoltage phase A stage 3 start V<3 Start B Undervoltage phase B stage 3 start V<3 Start C Undervoltage phase C stage 3 start… -
Page 339
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-19 Ordinal English Text Description Source SBO Closed Org 4 Select Before Operate (SBO) closing function for organ 4 (interlocking facility in the IEC60870-5-103 protocol) Fault_REC_TRIG Trigger for Fault Recorder Battery Fail Alarm battery fail PSL(OUT) -
Page 340
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-20 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source LED 2 Hardware version J — Programmable LED n° 2 is energized. Hardware version K — Programmable Red LED n° 2 is LED 2 Red energized ANY TRIP B in the default PSL LED 3… -
Page 341
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-21 Ordinal English Text Description Source LED Cond IN 4 Hardware version J — Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 4 LED 11 Red Hardware version K — Programmable Red LED n° 11 LED Cond IN 5 Hardware version J — Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 5… -
Page 342
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-22 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source LED 4 Grn Condit Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive output LED 4 green Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive LED 5 Red Condit output LED 5 red LED 5 Grn Condit… -
Page 343
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-23 Ordinal English Text Description Source FnKey LED 10 Red Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive output Function Key LED 10 Red Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive FnKey LED 10 Grn output Function Key LED 10 Green 800 to… -
Page 344
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-24 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1035 I A/R 3p In Pr. Three-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress: If it is PSL (IN) assigned to an opto input in the PSL and energised, the Autorecloser DDB:’A/R 3P in Prog’ will inform the P44x about the presence of an external 3P cycle. -
Page 345
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-25 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1043 Man. Close CB Circuit breaker manual close — order received. PSL (IN) CB Status ‘If it is assigned to an opto input in the PSL and energised the DDB:’Man Close CB’ signal will enable the internal ‘SOTF Enable’ logic without CB control activation. -
Page 346
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-26 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1051 DIST. COS Distance scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard PSL (IN) Un- (Carrier out of service) blocking logic DEF scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard PSL (IN) Un- 1052 DEF. -
Page 347
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-27 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1063 I>3 Timer Block Block phase overcurrent stage 3 time delay PSL (IN) I>3 Set to 1: ‘I>3 Time Delay’ will be blocked & I>3 will start but will not issue any trip command. -
Page 348
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-28 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1079 DIST. Tim. Block Block distance element time delay PSL (IN) At 1: The distance timer will be blocked & DIST will start Distance but will not perform a Trip command. -
Page 349
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-29 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1109 I<2 Timer Block Timer block phase undercurrent stage 2 PSL (IN) For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for «Monitor 1110 103 MontorBlock Blocking» (relay is quiet — issues no messages via SCADA port) 1111 For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for «Command… -
Page 350
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-30 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1544 to Unused (except next DDBs for specific options) 2047 1672 to LN1 Analog Alarm Relays with IEC 61850 9-2 Ethernet board only 1677 (software version D5.x) LN6 Analog Alarm If two consecutive of any Logical Node frames have not… -
Page 351
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-31 Ordinal English Text Description Source A/R 234 In Prog Further autoreclose cycles in progress: Used to PSL (OUT) indicate the autorecloser is timing out delayed Autorecloser autoreclose dead times for shots 2, 3 or 4. Where some protection elements should not initiate autoreclosure for Delayed Autoreclose (DAR) shots, the protection element operation is combined with ‘A/R… -
Page 352
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-32 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source A/R Lockout Autorecloser locked-out (no autoreclosure possible PSL (OUT) until reset), Autorecloser If protection operates during the reclaim time, after the final reclose attempt, the relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset. -
Page 353
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-33 Ordinal English Text Description Source A/R SPAR Enable Single pole autorecloser (SPAR) activated: If it is PSL (OUT) assigned to an opto input in the PSL (by default PSL is Autorecloser inverted and linked to opto and energized, The DDB:’A/R SPAR Enable’ will enable the 1-pole… -
Page 354
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-34 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source Any Int. Trip A Any internal protection A phase trip PSL (OUT) Default PSL: LED 1, Relay 02 All protection Any internal protection B phase trip PSL (OUT) Any Int. -
Page 355
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-35 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1038 Block internal autoreclose: Block Autoreclose (via an PSL (IN) opto input or in the PSL). Autorecloser The DDB:’BAR’ input will block the autoreclosure and lockout the autoreclose if a cycle is in progress. -
Page 356
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-36 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1040 CB Healthy Circuit breaker operational (gas pressure, mechanical PSL (IN) CB state) STATUS Must be at 1 inside the time window (setting: group1/ Autoreclose mode/ AR Inhibit Wind) during an AR cycle (‘A/R close’ and ‘A/R Reclaim’ pick up when ‘CB healthy’ is detected during the ‘A/R Inhibit Wind’ time-… -
Page 357
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-37 Ordinal English Text Description Source CT Fail Alarm Current transformers supervision indication: Indicates a PSL (OUT) CT Fail detected after time delay has elapsed is issued Supervision Manual (control) close in progress — using CB control PSL (OUT) Ctrl Cls In Prog (time-delay manual closing delay in progress). -
Page 358
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-38 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source DIST Fwd No Filt Distance protection: Forward fault detected not filtered PSL (OUT) (Directional Forward decision made by Distance logic Distance without any filter by Distance Start or Zone: Picks up faster than Dist Fwd) DIST Rev Distance protection: Reverse fault detected (default… -
Page 359
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-39 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1079 DIST. Tim. Block Block distance element time delay PSL (IN) At 1: The distance timer will be blocked & DIST will Distance start but will not perform a Trip command. Reset to 0: Opto input power off if signal assigned to an opto input OR DDB at 0 if signal assigned to a DDB cell… -
Page 360
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-40 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source F<4 Trip Underfrequency stage 4 trip F>1 Start Overfrequency stage 1 start 1104 F>1 Timer Block Timer block overfrequency stage 1 PSL (IN) F>1 Trip Overfrequency stage 1 trip F>2 Start Overfrequency stage 2 start… -
Page 361
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-41 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1042 Force 3P Trip Three pole tripping only: If it is assigned to an opto PSL (IN) input in the PSL and energised, the DDB:’Force 3P Trip’ signal will force the internal single-phase protection to trip three-poles (external order from Main1 to Main2 (P44x)) –… -
Page 362
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-42 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source I>1 Start Overcurrent stage 1 start PSL (OUT) Directional or not — with DT or IDMT curves Phase Overc. Directional managed by Delta Algorithms VTS Block time-delay facility 1061 I>1 Timer Block… -
Page 363
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-43 Ordinal English Text Description Source I2>2 Trip Negative overcurrent stage 2 trip I2>3 Start Negative overcurrent stage 3 pick-up 1067 I2>3 Timer Block Block negative sequence overcurrent stage 3 time PSL (IN) I>6 delay I2>3 Trip… -
Page 364
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-44 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source InterMiCOM in 1 InterMiCOM IM1 Signal Input — is driven by a message from the remote line end 577 to InterMiCOM in 2 to InterMiCOM IM2 Signal Input to InterMiCOM in 8 InterMiCOM IM8 Signal Input… -
Page 365
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-45 Ordinal English Text Description Source LED 3 Grn Hardware version K — Programmable Green LED n° 3 ANY TRIP C in the default PSL Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive LED 3 Grn Condit output LED 3 green LED 3 Red… -
Page 366
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-46 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source LED 8 Red Condit Hardware version K — Assignment of signal to drive output LED 8 red LED 9 Grn Hardware version K — Programmable Green LED n° 9 LED 9 Red Hardware version K — Programmable Red LED n°… -
Page 367
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-47 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1043 Man. Close CB Circuit breaker manual close — order received. PSL (IN) CB Status ‘If it is assigned to an opto input in the PSL and energised the DDB:’Man Close CB’ signal will enable the internal ‘SOTF Enable’ logic without CB control activation. -
Page 368
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-48 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source Opto Label 01 OPTO ISOLATOR 1 OPTO Set to 1 when the opto input is energised for a minimum time: 7ms (48Vdc), 10ms (universal) to be validated by internal logic To enable the selection of a setting group by state change of the opto isolated logic inputs 1 and 2,… -
Page 369
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-49 Ordinal English Text Description Source 0 to 63 Relay Label 01 to OUTPUT RELAY 1 to RELAY Relay Label 64 OUTPUT RELAY 64 High level when a DDB cell (linked by PSL logic) is at 1. -
Page 370
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-50 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1125 SBO DPI2 Org3 SBO support for IEC 61850-8-1 function SBO Double Point Information 2 Organe 3 SBO support for IEC61850-8-1 function SBO Double 1129 SBO DPI2 Org4 Point Information 2 Organe 4… -
Page 371
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-51 Ordinal English Text Description Source Distance time-delay in zone 2 tZ2 elapsed (1 = end of PSL (OUT) timer) Distance 1095 T2 Timer Block Timer block T2 input Distance time-delay in zone 3 tZ3elapsed (1 = end of PSL (OUT) timer) Distance… -
Page 372
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-52 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source Timer in zone Q elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) 1097 TZq Timer Block Timer block TZq input 1084 User Trip A Internal input for trip logic A PSL (IN) Trip Set to 1: Trip A Internal input managed with the Logic… -
Page 373
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-53 Ordinal English Text Description Source V<3 Start A Undervoltage phase A stage 3 start V<3 Start B Undervoltage phase B stage 3 start V<3 Start C Undervoltage phase C stage 3 start 1071 V<3 Timer Block Block phase undervoltage stage 3 time delay… -
Page 374
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-54 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source 1074 V>2 Timer Block Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delay PSL (IN) V>2 Set to 1: ‘V>2 Time Delay’ will be blocked and V>2 will start but will not issue any trip command. -
Page 375
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-55 Ordinal English Text Description Source VT Fail Alarm Fuse failure indication (VT alarm). High when the opto PSL (OUT) input is energised (copy of MCB) OR an internal Fuse Failure is confirmed when the VTS timer elapses. -
Page 376
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-56 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Ordinal English Text Description Source LBlinder DetectBN Load Blinder Detection in Loop BN: Cell at 1 indicates PSL (OUT) the Impedance is located within the BN loop Load Distance Blinder Region. -
Page 377
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-57 Opto Input P442 Relay P444 Relay N° Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated 1.2.2 Relay output contact mapping The default mappings and conditioning for each of the relay output contacts are shown in the following table (PSL are equivalent for P442/444): Relay Contact… -
Page 378
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-58 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Relay Contact P442 Relay P444 Relay N° Not allocated Note: When 3-pole tripping mode is selected in the menu ‘Distance Schemes / Trip mode’, all the relay contacts connected to a trip (trip A, trip B, trip C, and Any Trip) close simultaneously. -
Page 379
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-59 1.2.3 Programmable LED output mapping The default mappings for each of the programmable LEDs are as shown in the following table: P442 Relay P444 Relay Any Trip A Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip B Any Trip C… -
Page 380
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-60 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM PX40 IEC 61850 IED CONFIGURATOR IEC 61850 is a substation communications standard. It standardizes the way data is transferred to and from IEC 61850 compliant IEDs, making the communication independent of the manufacturer. -
Page 381
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-61 GOOSE EDITOR Using the GOOSE Editor you can edit the UCA2 GOOSE settings for a MiCOM Px4x series IED. You can also map GOOOSE inputs and outputs to the DDB signals of an IED. The GOOSE Editor can extract settings from and send settings to an IED using a Courier port on the IED. -
Page 382
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-62 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL) Example: MiCOM P444 with 46 outputs Input-Opto Couplers DEF. Chan Recv DDB #1050 Opto Label 01 DIST. Chan Recv DDB #064 DDB #1049 DIST. COS DDB #1051 Opto Label 02 DEF. -
Page 383
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-63 Output Contact Trip Z1 DDB #255 & Relay Label 01 Straight DDB #000 DIST Trip A DDB #246 DIST Trip B DDB #247 Dist Aided Trip DIST Trip C DDB #248 &… -
Page 384
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-64 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 Output Contact General Start Any Start Relay Label 06 Straight DDB #317 DDB #005 General Start Dwell LED 4 Red DDB #646 Latching LED 4 Grn DDB #647 Starting Fault Recorder Fault_REC_TRIG Any Trip DDB #468… -
Page 385
Programmable Logic P44x/EN PL/Hb6 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444 (PL) 6-65 Leds Front Panel Trip A Any Trip A LED 1 Red DDB #325 DDB #640 Latching LED 1 Grn DDB #641 Trip B Any Trip B LED 2 Red DDB #326 DDB #642 Latching… -
Page 386
P44x/EN PL/Hb6 Programmable Logic (PL) 6-66 MiCOM 40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 387
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-1 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Date: 2017… -
Page 388
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 389
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-3 CONTENTS MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Introductions Event and fault recorder 1.2.1 Event Recorder (“View records” menu) 1.2.2 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs. 1.2.3 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts. -
Page 390
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-4 MiCOM P442 & P444… -
Page 391
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-5 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Introductions The MiCOM P442 and P444 are equipped with integral measurements, event, fault and disturbance recording facilities suitable for analysis of complex system disturbances. The relay is flexible enough to allow for the programming of these facilities to specific user application requirements and are discussed below. -
Page 392
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-6 MiCOM P442 & P444 VIEW RECORDS LCD Reference Description Earth Fault Start IN>1, Start IN>2, Start IN>3 or Start IN>4 Earth Fault Trip IN>1, Trip IN>2, Trip IN>3 or Trip IN>4 Aided DEF DEF>… -
Page 393
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-7 VIEW RECORDS LCD Reference Description Fault Location When calculated the fault location can be found (distance in km or miles, impedance or percentage of line length, set in ‘MEASUREMENT SETUP’… -
Page 394
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-8 MiCOM P442 & P444 1.2.3 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts. If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. -
Page 395
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-9 Alarm Event Text Explanation Bit 21 SG-opto Invalid Setting group via optos invalid Bit 22 A/R No Checksync CB Fail to A/R Bit 23 V<1 Alarm Bit 24 V<2 Alarm… -
Page 396
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-10 MiCOM P442 & P444 Text Explanation LCD Failure LCD Failure Watchdog 1 Fail Watchdog 1 Failure (Fast) Watchdog 2 Fail Watchdog 2 Failure (Slow) Field Volt Fail Field Voltage Failure FlashEEPROM Fail Flash EPROM Failure EEPROM Fail EEPROM Failure Cal EEPROM Fail… -
Page 397
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-11 Event Type: Fault record Monday 03 November 2010 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 MiCOM Model Number: P442 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state… -
Page 398
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-12 MiCOM P442 & P444 Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder (“Disturb recorder” menu, P44x/EN ST) has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. -
Page 399
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-13 Figure 2 — Fault Location information included in an event:… -
Page 400
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-14 MiCOM P442 & P444 MEASUREMENTS The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated system quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and can be viewed in the “Measurements”… -
Page 401
Measurements and Recording P44x/EN MR/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MR) 7-15 P442 P444 MEASUREMENTS 1 ∗ ∗ VCN Phase Angle ∗ ∗ VN Magnitude ∗ ∗ VN Angle ∗ ∗ V1 Magnitude ∗ ∗ V2 Magnitude ∗ ∗ V0 Magnitude ∗… -
Page 402
P44x/EN MR/Hb6 Measurements and Recording (MR) 7-16 MiCOM P442 & P444 P442 P444 MEASUREMENTS 3 ∗ ∗ Thermal Status ∗ ∗ Reset Thermal… -
Page 403
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-1 FIRMWARE DESIGN Date: 2017… -
Page 404
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 405
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-3 CONTENTS RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview 1.1.1 Power supply module 1.1.2 Main processor board 1.1.3 Co-processor board 1.1.4 Input module 1.1.5 Input and output boards 1.1.6 IRIG-B modulated or unmodulated board 1.1.7… -
Page 406
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.3.3 Database interface Protection and control software 3.4.1 Overview — protection and control scheduling 3.4.2 Signal processing 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic 3.4.4 Event and Fault Recording 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder 3.4.6… -
Page 407
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-5 RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s requirements. -
Page 408
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Present values CPU code & data, Alarm, event, fault, Default settings & of all setting disturbance & parameters, language text, settings database data maintenance record software code Battery Flash SRAM E²PROM… -
Page 409
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-7 1.1.7 Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional) The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic. It is denoted “SK4”. -
Page 410
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relay’s hardware and the rest of the relay software. -
Page 411
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-9 HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules. -
Page 412
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consists of two PCBs;… -
Page 413
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-11 Up to 5 current inputs 3/4 voltage inputs Transformer board Input board 16:1 Multiplexer Parallel bus P3027ENa Figure 2 — Main Input Board The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. -
Page 414
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Nominal Standard 60% — 80% 50% — 70% battery voltage No Operation Operation No Operation Operation (Vdc) (logic 0) Vdc (logic 1) Vdc (logic 0) Vdc (logic 1) Vdc 24 / 27 <16.2… -
Page 415
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-13 2.5.2 Output relay board (standard) The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22 V power supply line. The relays’… -
Page 416
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only) and with the second rear communication board (see next section). -
Page 417
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-15 For all copper based network connections an RJ45 style connector is supported. 10 Mbit/s fibre network connections use an ST style connector while 100 Mbit/s connections use the SC style fibre connection. An extra processor, a Motorola PPC, and memory block is fitted to the Ethernet card that is responsible for running all the network related functions such as TCP/IP/OSI as supplied by VxWorks and the UCA2/MMS server as supplied by Sisco inc. -
Page 418
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 RELAY SOFTWARE The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this section. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: •… -
Page 419
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-17 Platform software The platform software has three main functions: • To control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records. -
Page 420
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.4.1 Overview — protection and control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a ‘sampling function’… -
Page 421
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-19 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. -
Page 422
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relay’s hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the… -
Page 423
Firmware Design P44x/EN FD/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (FD) 8-21 4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data;… -
Page 424
P44x/EN FD/Hb6 Firmware Design (FD) 8-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 425
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-1 COMMISSIONING Date: 2017… -
Page 426
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 427
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION SETTING FAMILIARISATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING Minimum Equipment Required Optional Equipment PRODUCT CHECKS With the Relay De-energised 4.1.1 Visual Inspection 4.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts 4.1.3 External Wiring 4.1.4… -
Page 428
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ON-LOAD CHECKS Voltage Connections Current Connections FINAL CHECKS… -
Page 429
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-5 INTRODUCTION The MiCOM P44x distance protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical electronic or electro-mechanical relays. -
Page 430
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 SETTING FAMILIARISATION When commissioning a MiCOM P44x relay for the first time, allow enough time to become familiar with the method the settings are applied. With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are accessible. All menu cells can be read. -
Page 431
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-7 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING Minimum Equipment Required Overcurrent test set with interval timer 110 V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional) Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440 V and… -
Page 432
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 PRODUCT CHECKS These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. -
Page 433
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-9 4.1.1 Visual Inspection Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. -
Page 434
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Heavy duty terminal block Medium duty terminal block P3004ENa Figure 1: Location of Securing Screws for Terminal Blocks Shorting contact between terminals Current Input 1A CT’s 5A CT’s C3-C2 C1-C2… -
Page 435
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-11 The main groups of relay terminals are: • Voltage transformer circuits. • Current transformer circuits • Auxiliary voltage supply. • Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs. • Relay contacts. -
Page 436
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 4.2.1 Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in Table 3 for an energized relay. 4.2.2 Date and Time The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay. -
Page 437
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-13 The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSIONING TESTS menu column. Set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Enabled’. Check that the alarm and out of service LEDs illuminate. -
Page 438
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Apply field voltage to terminals P442 P444 Opto input 8 Opto input 9 Opto input 10 Opto input 11 Opto input 12 Opto input 13 Opto input 14 Opto input 15… -
Page 439
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-15 Relay 4 H7-H9 H8-H9 Relay 15 F1-F2 Relay 5 H10-H12 H11-H12 Relay 16 F3-F4 Relay 6 H13-H15 H14-H15 Relay 17 F5-F6 Relay 7 H16-H18 H17-H18 Relay 18 F7-F9 F8-F9 Relay 8… -
Page 440
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay 3 M5-M6 HB relay 20 J15(–)-J16(+) Relay 4 M7-M8 Relay 21 H1-H2 Relay 5 M9-M10 Relay 22 H3-H4 Relay 6 M11-M12 Relay 23 H5-H6 Relay 7 M13-M15 M14-M15 Relay 24… -
Page 441
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-17 4.2.9.2 Modbus Communications Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to the relay’s RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relay’s RS485 port are given in Table 7. -
Page 442
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 0A0B:MComp/CT Primary [022F: IM Mutual Current Mag] or [0209: IN Mag] 0A0C:MComp CT Sec’y Table 9 — CT Ratio Settings 4.2.11 Voltage Inputs This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. -
Page 443
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-19 SETTING CHECKS The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular installation have been correctly applied to the relay. -
Page 444
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation 5.3.1 Functional Tests: Start control & Distance characteristic limits Despite of working in 100% numerical technology some tests could be performed in order to check that the relay has the right characteristics; regarding the different choices for functions and settings (protection (with MiCOM S1 Agile / settings &… -
Page 445
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-21 Note 1: Check the measurement reference (ref. angle of phase shift) in: «Measurt set up/Measurement ref.» (VA by default). Monitoring can also be selected to poll the network parameters (I/U/P/Q/f…) -
Page 446
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 3: Measurement 1/LCD menu… -
Page 447
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-23 Check the polarisation of the protection: inject a three-phase symmetrical load according to the following table: 20° Currents -100° +140° TEST 2 57 V 0° Voltages 57 V -120° 57 V +120°… -
Page 448
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MEASURE’T SETUP Default Display Default Display Measurement Ref Description Description Default Display Measurement Ref Measurement Ref Date and Time Default Display Measurement Ref P — P Default Display Measurement Ref… -
Page 449
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-25 5.3.1.2 Default simulation principle To simulate a single-phase fault The distance protection detects a single-phase default in E if the impedance and phase of this point place it inside the characteristic. The relation between the impedance and phase and the injected voltage and current is as follows: •… -
Page 450
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 8: Example of Z-graph screen (Rio format can be created as well) Figure 9: Evolving impedance from the load area to the final fault impedance in Zone1 To simulate a fault in a zone, it is necessary to vary the current progressively to move the point from the load area into the desired zone. -
Page 451
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-27 Figure 10: Single characteristic with P forward zone Z1, Z2, Z3, Zp, Z4 : limits of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 R1G, R2G, R3G, RpG : resistance limits of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 for single-phase fault. -
Page 452
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-28 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 In the characteristic above, the parts marked A, B and C are intersections between several zones. • The surface A is considered as being in zone 1. • The surface B is not a part of the characteristic (no start element). -
Page 453
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-29 αβ Fault simulation = 2 x Zd + Rfault Where: Uαβ : phase-to-phase fault voltage : fault current ϕ1 : fault angle Rfault = R loop For a three-phase fault:… -
Page 454
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-30 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.3.1.3 Check and test of the starting characteristics In this part – tests are described with the default parameters Open the MiCOM characteristics file If no changes have been made, the following values are… -
Page 455
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-31 LED 8 Latching DDB #069 DDB #191 LED 7 Latching DDB #070 DDB #193 Non- LED 8 Latching DDB #071 DDB #198 P3018ENa Figure 13: If the LEDs are latched, the reset latch could be enabled by a dedicated PSL, to avoid… -
Page 456
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-32 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Test point I,V phase shift Tripping time B:Bi M:mono (I is behind V) R1 B 0° R1 M 0° R2 B 0° R2 M 0° Rp B 0° Rp M 0°… -
Page 457
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-33 If Z3 is disabled, the resistance limits R3-R4 are no longer visible in MiCOM S1 Agile. Note: All other characteristic points can be tested after calculating the impedance and the phase shift between U and I. -
Page 458
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-34 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 18: Example: ABC-limZ4 (Reverse) VAN/IAN = Zf=Rf=20 V/0,500 mA=40 Ω=Lim Z4 with angle(VAN/IAN)=70°-180°=-110° Note: Simulator use can generate transients greater than 0.2 In on currents where the generation of a fault condition can induce errors about the directional calculation with «Delta»… -
Page 459
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-35 5.3.2 Distance scheme test (if activated in MiCOM S1 Agile) 5.3.2.1 Control • The type of distance scheme enabled in MiCOM S1 Agile • The DDB cells assigned for the distance scheme •… -
Page 460
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-36 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 5.3.3 Loss of guard/loss of carrier test Setting: TEST: Follow the truth table (section P44x/EN AP) Note: In case of channel-aided loss, the scheme Z1X (out fail) will be applied if selected in MiCOM S1 Agile 5.3.4… -
Page 461
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-37 Put into service the weak infeed mode (single-pole possible); 1. Inhibit tripping authorisation and phase selection. 2. Enable the carrier receive input. 3. Check that: the channel-aided scheme transmission signal is enabled;… -
Page 462
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-38 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Signal repercussions: The signal (VT fail alarm) drops off if: MCB/VTS Line VTS Fast DDB #101 DDB #263 VT Fail Alarm MCB/VTS Bus DDB #100 DDB #132 P3022ENa Fuse_Failure = 0… -
Page 463
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-39 If cell [351D: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, VCO Status] is set to ‘Enabled’ (overcurrent function configured for voltage controlled overcurrent operation) or [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] has been set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C19 and C22. -
Page 464
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-40 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Check that all output relays used for circuit breaker tripping and closing, blocking other devices, etc. operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle. -
Page 465
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-41 ON-LOAD CHECKS Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads, and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. -
Page 466
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-42 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Current Connections Measure the current transformer secondary values for each using a multimeter connected in series with the corresponding relay current input. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle… -
Page 467
Commissioning P44x/EN CM/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CM) 9-43 FINAL CHECKS The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. -
Page 468
P44x/EN CM/Hb6 Commissioning (CM) 9-44 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 469
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-1 MAINTENANCE Date: 2017… -
Page 470
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 471
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-3 CONTENTS MAINTENANCE Maintenance Period Maintenance Checks 1.2.1 Alarms 1.2.2 Opto-isolators 1.2.3 Output Relays 1.2.4 Measurement accuracy Method of Repair 1.3.1 Replacing the Complete Relay 1.3.2 Replacing a PCB Recalibration Changing the battery 1.5.1… -
Page 472
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 473
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-5 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Period It is recommended that products supplied by General Electric receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. -
Page 474
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Method of Repair If the relay should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs must be replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. -
Page 475
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-7 Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal connectors. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are fitted and open. -
Page 476
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 P442 P444 Figure 2 — P44x PCB/Module Locations (Viewed from front) The PCBs within the relay are now accessible, Figure 2 show the PCB locations for the distance relays in size 60TE (P442). -
Page 477
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-9 Part Number P442 P444 Main processor and user interface board ZN0006-001 Co-processor board ZN0003 003 Power Supply Board (24/54V dc) ZN0001 001 (48/125V dc) ZN0001 002 (110/250V dc) ZN0001 003… -
Page 478
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all the other PCBs. Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws from the metallic screen, as shown in Figure 3. -
Page 479
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-11 1.3.2.2 Replacement of an optional (IRIG-B, Ethernet…) board To replace a faulty board, disconnect all connections at the rear of the relay. Depending on the model number of the relay, the optional board may have connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications, etc. -
Page 480
Maintenance (MT) 10-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 1.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press on the location of the hinge- assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. -
Page 481
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-13 The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. -
Page 482
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 (inclusive) of this document. 1.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in 8.3.2.4… -
Page 483
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-15 Figure 9 – Typical Opto Board Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 (inclusive) of this document. -
Page 484
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 10: Typical opto board Recalibration Recalibration is not usually required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of the two boards in the input module, the replacement of which directly affect the calibration. -
Page 485
Maintenance P44x/EN MT/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (MT) 10-17 Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the bottom access cover. -
Page 486
P44x/EN MT/Hb6 Maintenance (MT) 10-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 487: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-1 TROUBLESHOOTING Date: 2017…
-
Page 488
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 489
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION POWER UP ERRORS ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING… -
Page 490
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 491
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-5 INTRODUCTION Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section/Safety Guide Pxxx-SG-4L-2 or later issue, the Technical Data chapter and the ratings on the equipment rating label. -
Page 492
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem experienced, then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis of the problem. -
Page 493
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-7 POWER UP ERRORS If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power supply module of the relay or the relay front panel. -
Page 494
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP During the power-up sequence of the relay self-testing is performed as indicated by the messages displayed on the LCD. If an error is detected by the relay during these self-tests then an error message will be displayed and the power-up sequence will be halted. -
Page 495
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-9 OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP Test Check Action Using the relay menu confirm If the setting is Enabled then disable the test whether the Commission Test/Test mode and, verify that the Out of Service LED is Mode setting is Enabled. -
Page 496
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION The relay performs continuous self-checking, if an error is detected then an error message will be displayed, a maintenance record will be logged and the relay will reset (after a 1.6 second delay). -
Page 497
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-11 Hex Code Decimal Code Meaning 0x0C160012 202768402 The continuous self-checks have found an error in the Flash EPROM checksum. Check the Flash EPROM on the main processor board, and then try downloading a new program. -
Page 498
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING Failure of output contacts An apparent failure of the relay output contacts may be caused by the relay configuration; the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of the failure. Note that the relay self-tests verify that the coil of the contact has been energized, an error will be displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board. -
Page 499
Troubleshooting P44x/EN TS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (TS) 11-13 Incorrect analog signals The measurements may be configured in primary or secondary to assist. If it is suspected that the analog quantities being measured by the relay are not correct then the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the nature of the problem. -
Page 500
P44x/EN TS/Hb6 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 501
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-1 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Date: 2017… -
Page 502
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 503
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-3 CONTENTS SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Introduction Rear port information and connection advice – EIA(RS)485 protocols 1.2.1 Rear communication port EIA(RS)485 interface 1.2.2 Courier communication 1.2.3 MODBUS communication 1.2.4 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 1.2.5… -
Page 504
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.7.1 Password protection 3.7.2 Control and support settings 3.7.3 Protection and disturbance recorder settings Date and time format (data type G12) Power & energy measurement data formats (G29 & G125) 3.9.1… -
Page 505
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-5 Ethernet functionality 6.7.1 Ethernet disconnection 6.7.2 Loss of power… -
Page 506
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 FIGURES Figure 1: EIA(RS)485 Bus connection arrangements Figure 2: Remote communication connection arrangements Figure 3: Manual selection of a disturbance record Figure 4: Automatic selection of a disturbance – option 1 Figure 5: Automatic selection of a disturbance –… -
Page 507
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-7 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Introduction This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of the MiCOM relay. The relay supports a choice of one of five protocols via the rear communication interface, selected via the model number when ordering. -
Page 508
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.2.1.3 Bus connections & topologies The EIA(RS)485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the physical cable that is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, as are star topologies. -
Page 509
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-9 It is possible to use the products field voltage output (48 V DC) to bias the bus using values of 2.2 kΩ (½W) as bias resistors instead of the 180 Ω resistors shown in the above diagram. -
Page 510
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 2: Remote communication connection arrangements Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms. -
Page 511
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-11 for the relay address, which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. -
Page 512
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 1.2.4 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA(RS)485 connection over distances up to 1000m. -
Page 513
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-13 RP2 address Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 2, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. -
Page 514
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Working offline: Click the icon New MiCOM Configuration from an Installed ICD File. Double-click the product variant. Double-click the Communications item. Or working online: Select Device > Manage IED. -
Page 515
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-15 COURIER INTERFACE Courier protocol K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels with HDLC FM0 encoded synchronous signalling and its own frame format. The K-Bus twisted pair connection is unpolarized, whereas the EIA(RS)485 and EIA(RS)232 interfaces are polarized. -
Page 516
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting Changes Enter Setting Mode Preload Setting Abort Setting Execute Setting Reset Menu Cell Set Value Control Commands Select Setting Group Change Device Address* Set Real Time Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front Courier port. -
Page 517
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-17 Setting changes (See R6512, Courier User Guide — Chapter 9) There are three categories of settings within the relay database: • Control and support • Disturbance recorder • Protection settings group Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. -
Page 518
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 2.5.2 Event types Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: • Change of state of output contact • Change of state of opto input • Protection element operation •… -
Page 519
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-19 Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) – This cell can be used to select a maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way to the fault record selection. -
Page 520
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MODBUS INTERFACE The MODBUS interface is a master/slave protocol and it is defined by MODBUS.org: See www.modbus.org MODBUS Serial Protocol Reference Guide: PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E Communication link This interface also uses the rear EIA(RS)485 port (or converted fiber optic port) for communication using ‘RTU’… -
Page 521
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-21 Code MODBUS Description MiCOM Interpretation range cannot be accessed due to password protection then all changes within the request are discarded and this error response will be returned. Note: If the start address is correct but the range includes non–implemented addresses this… -
Page 522
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by the relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault or maintenance record details will also become populated. -
Page 523
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-23 Disturbance record extraction The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance records. The extraction mechanisms are explained below: 3.6.1 Extraction mechanism Records extracted over MODBUS from Px40 platform relays will be presented in COMTRADE format. -
Page 524
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MODBUS Register Name Description 3×00802 of registers in data This register informs the master station of the page number of registers in the data page that are populated. 3×00803 – 3×00929… -
Page 525
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-25 Figure 3: Manual selection of a disturbance record 3.6.2.2 Automatic extraction procedure There are two methods that can be used for automatically extracting disturbances. Option 1 is simpler and is better at extracting single disturbance records, i.e. when the disturbance recorder is polled regularly. -
Page 526
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Figure 4: Automatic selection of a disturbance – option 1 3.6.2.4 Automatic extraction procedure – option 2 The second method used for automatic extraction is shown in the following figure. This also… -
Page 527
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-27 Figure 5: Automatic selection of a disturbance – option 2… -
Page 528
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-28 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 3.6.3 Extracting the disturbance data The extraction of the disturbance record, as shown in the three figures above, is a two-stage process that involves extracting the configuration file first and then the data file. -
Page 529
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-29 Figure 7: Extracting the comtrade binary data file During the extraction of the COMTRADE files, an error may occur that will be reported on the DR Status register 3×00934. This can be caused by the relay overwriting the record being extracted or due to the master station issuing a command that is not within the bounds of the extraction procedure. -
Page 530
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-30 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Setting changes The relay settings can be split into two categories: • Control and support settings • Disturbance record settings and protection setting groups Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately. Changes to the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder settings are stored in a temporary ‘scratchpad’… -
Page 531
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-31 Group 3 45000 — 46999 Group 4 47000 — 48999 In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups, the following functions are provided: • Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings by writing to register 40402. -
Page 532
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-32 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 range 0ms…99 years Since the range of the data type is only 100 years, the century must be deduced. The century is calculated as the one that will produce the nearest time value to the current date. -
Page 533
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-33 The G28 part of the value is the truncated per unit quantity, which will be equal to 64 (40h). The multiplier is derived from the VT and CT ratios set in the relay, with the equation ((CT Primary) ×… -
Page 534
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-34 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported. -
Page 535
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-35 Spontaneous events Events are categorized using the following information: • Function type • Information number The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the menu database contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. -
Page 536
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-36 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 DNP3.0 INTERFACE DNP3.0 protocol The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document that is included in the menu database. The DNP3.0 protocol is not described here, please refer to the documentation available from the user group. -
Page 537
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-37 Object 20 binary counters Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The binary counters can be read as their present ‘running’ value from object 20, or as a ‘frozen’ value from object 21. -
Page 538
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-38 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 counters having different point numbers to their running counterparts. For example, object 20 point 3 (running counter) might have its frozen value reported as object 21 point 1. 5.7.3… -
Page 539
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-39 IEC 61850 ETHERNET INTERFACE Introduction IEC 61850 is the international standard for Ethernet-based communication in substations. It enables integration of all protection, control, measurement and monitoring functions within a substation, and additionally provides the means for interlocking and inter-tripping. -
Page 540
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-40 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 − Physical Device – Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically t the device’s name or IP address can be used (for e example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2). −… -
Page 541
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-41 The record is extracted as an ASCII format COMTRADE file. Setting changes (e.g. of protection settings) are not supported in the current IEC 61850 implementation. In order to keep this process as simple as possible, such setting changes are done using MiCOM S1 Agile Settings &… -
Page 542
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-42 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up. An alarm will be raised if an IP conflict is detected. The relay can be configured to accept data from networks other than the local network by using the ‘Gateway’… -
Page 543
SCADA Communications P44x/EN SC/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SC) 12-43 • INT16 • INT32 • INT8 • UINT16 • UINT32 • UINT8 6.6.2 IEC 61850 GOOSE configuration All GOOSE configuration is performed via the IED Configurator tool available within the MiCOM S1 Agile Support Software. -
Page 544
P44x/EN SC/Hb6 SCADA Communications (SC) 12-44 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 545
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-1 SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY Date: 2017… -
Page 546
P44x/EN SG/Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 547
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-3 Logic Symbols used Symbols Explanation & Logical “AND”: Used in logic diagrams to show an AND-gate function. Σ “Sigma”: Used to indicate a summation, such as cumulative current interrupted. -
Page 548
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Symbols Explanation CsZ1 Carrier sent by Z1 Current transformer. CTRL. Abbreviation of “Control”: As used for the Control Inputs function. Current transformer supervision (to detect CT input failure.) -
Page 549
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-5 Symbols Explanation ∧ Current raised to a power: Such as when breaker statistics monitor the square of ruptured current squared ∧ power = 2). Abbreviation of “Inputs and Outputs”: Used in connection with the number of optocoupled inputs and output contacts within the relay. -
Page 550
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Symbols Explanation Intelligent Electronic Device: For example a MiCOM relay The rated nominal current of the relay: Software selectable as 1 amp or 5 amps to match the line CT input. -
Page 551
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-7 Symbols Explanation A normally open or “make” contact: Often called a “form A” contact. NCIT Non Conventional Instrument Transformer Network Interface Card: i.e. the Ethernet card of the IED Negative phase sequence. -
Page 552
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Symbols Explanation The equivalent a.c. current: Taking into account the fundamental, plus the equivalent heating effect of any harmonics. Abbreviation of “root mean square”. Abbreviation of “Rear Port”: The communication ports on the rear of the relay. -
Page 553
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-9 Symbols Explanation Zero sequence voltage: Equals one third of the measured neutral/residual voltage. Positive sequence voltage. Negative sequence voltage. V2pol Negative sequence polarizing voltage. Phase A voltage: Might be phase L1, red phase. or other, in customer terminology. -
Page 554
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Logic Timers Logic Explanation Time Chart Symbols Delay on pick-up timer, t Delay on drop-off timer, t Delay on pick-up/drop-off timer Pulse timer Pulse pick-up falling edge… -
Page 555
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-11 Logic Explanation Time Chart Symbols Dwell timer Straight (non latching): Hold value until input reset signal… -
Page 556
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Logic Gates AND GATE Symbol Truth Table Symbol Truth Table Symbol Truth Table & & & OR GATE Symbol Truth Table Truth Table Truth Table Symbol Symbol S –… -
Page 557
Symbols and Glossary P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (SG) 13-13 Specific inputs or outputs in this manual: Internal logic status from the logic of the protection (« the line is dead » or « the pole is dead ») -
Page 558
P44x/EN SG/ Hb6 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 13-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 559
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN)14-1 INSTALLATION Date: 2017… -
Page 560
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 561
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-3 CONTENT RECEIPT OF RELAYS HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE UNPACKING RELAY MOUNTING Rack mounting Panel mounting RELAY WIRING Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections RS485 port IRIG-B connections (if applicable) -
Page 562
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 563
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-5 RECEIPT OF RELAYS Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. On receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. -
Page 564
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not always immediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. -
Page 565
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-7 STORAGE If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. -
Page 566
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 UNPACKING Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. -
Page 567
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-9 RELAY MOUNTING MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found in the product publication. -
Page 568
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Rack mounting MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number FX0021 001), as shown in Figure 2. These frames have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. -
Page 569
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-11 Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”. Case size summation Blanking plate part number GJ2028 001 10TE GJ2028 002… -
Page 570
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Width Single tier Double tier 60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028 65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029 70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030 75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031 80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032 Table 2 — IP52 sealing rings Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts… -
Page 571
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-13 RELAY WIRING This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the MiCOM relay. Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections… -
Page 572
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50 Ω. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath. -
Page 573
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-15 MICOM P442 – REAR VIEW (HARDWARE M) A – Optional board F – Output relay/High Break board B – Optional board G – Output relay board C – Current and voltage input board F –… -
Page 574
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM P442 with Standard contacts — Wiring Diagram (1/5) P3909ENb… -
Page 575
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-17 MICOM P442 with High Break contacts — Wiring Diagram (2/5) P3943ENa… -
Page 576
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM P442 with NCIT and Standard contacts — Wiring Diagram (3/5) W02940… -
Page 577
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-19 MICOM P442 with NCIT and High Break contacts — Wiring Diagram (4/5) W02944… -
Page 578
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM P442 – Wiring Diagram (5/5) -
Page 579
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-21 MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION (HARWARE M) -
Page 580
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-22 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MiCOM P444 – Rear View A – Optional board H – Relay board B – Optional board J – Output relay/High Break board C – Current and voltage input board K –… -
Page 581
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-23 MICOM P444 with Standard contacts — Wiring Diagram (1/4) P3910ENc… -
Page 582
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-24 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM P444 with High Break contacts — Wiring Diagram (2/4) P3944ENa… -
Page 583
Installation P44x/EN IN/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (IN) 14-25 MICOM P444 with NCIT and High Break contacts — Wiring Diagram (3/4) P5001ENa… -
Page 584
P44x/EN IN/Hb6 Installation (IN) 14-26 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 MICOM P444 – Wiring Diagram (4/4) -
Page 585
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (CS) 15-1 CYBER SECURITY Date: 2017… -
Page 586
P44x/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444… -
Page 587
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-3 CONTENTS OVERVIEW THE NEED FOR CYBER SECURITY STANDARDS NERC Compliance 3.1.1 CIP 002 3.1.2 CIP 003 3.1.3 CIP 004 3.1.4 CIP 005 3.1.5 CIP 006 3.1.6 CIP 007 3.1.7… -
Page 588
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444… -
Page 589
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-5 OVERVIEW In the past, substation networks were traditionally isolated and the protocols and data formats used to transfer information between devices were more often than not proprietary. For these reasons, the substation environment was very secure against cyber attacks. The terms used for this inherent type of security are: •… -
Page 590
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 THE NEED FOR CYBER SECURITY Cyber-security provides protection against unauthorized disclosure, transfer, modification, or destruction of information and/or information systems, whether accidental or intentional. To achieve this, there are several security requirements: •… -
Page 591
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-7 STANDARDS There are several standards, which apply to substation cyber security (see Table 1). Country NERC CIP (North American Electric Framework for the protection of the grid Reliability Corporation) -
Page 592
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 NERC Compliance The North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) created a set of standards for the protection of critical infrastructure. These are known as the CIP standards (Critical Infrastructure Protection). -
Page 593
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-9 Power utility responsibilities: Contribution: We can help the power utilities to have access control to its critical assets by providing centralized Access control. To create a Cyber Security Policy… -
Page 594
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 • Account management • Monitoring • An annual vulnerability assessment should be performed Power utility responsibilities: Contribution: Test procedures; We can provide advice and help on testing. Ports and services; Our devices can disable unused ports and services Security patch management;… -
Page 595
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-11 PX40 CYBER SECURITY IMPLEMENTATION General Electric IEDs have always been and will continue to be equipped with state-of-the- art security measures. Due to the ever-evolving communication technology and new threats to security, this requirement is not static. -
Page 596
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation Read All All data and settings are All items writeable at level 1. readable. Write Some Setting Cells that change visibility Poll Measurements (Visible/Invisible). -
Page 597
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-13 • FPort AccessLvl2 • RPrt1 AccessLvl1 • RPrt1 AccessLvl2 • RPrt2 AccessLvl1 • RPrt2 AccessLvl2 Where HMI is the Human Machine Interface. Each pair of DDB signals indicates the access level as follows: •… -
Page 598
Cyber Security (CS) 15-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 then uses appropriate response codes to inform the client that the password was NERC- compliant or not. The client then can choose if he/she wishes to enter a new password that is NERC-compliant or leave the entered one in place. -
Page 599
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-15 Password Recovery Password recovery is the means by which the passwords can be recovered on a device if the customer should mislay the configured passwords. To obtain the recovery password the customer must contact the General Electric Customer Care Center and supply two pieces of information from the IED –… -
Page 600
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 Port Disablement 4.6.1 Disabling Physical Ports It is possible to disable unused physical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action. To prevent accidental disabling of a port, a warning message is displayed according to whichever port is required to be disabled. -
Page 601
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-17 LOGGED OUT Access Level <x> Where x is the current fallback level. If you decide not to log out (i.e. you cancel), the following message is displayed for 2 seconds. -
Page 602
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-18 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 Event Value Display DNP STNG D/LOAD DNP SETTINGS DOWNLOADED BY <int> TRACE DAT D/LOAD TRACE DATA DOWNLOADED BY <int> IED CONFG D/LOAD IEC61850 CONFIG DOWNLOADED BY <int> USER CRV D/LOAD USER CURVES DOWNLOADED BY <int>… -
Page 603
Cyber Security P44x/EN CS/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 (CS) 15-19 p is the password level (1, 2, 3) nov is the number of events (1 – nnn) Each event is identified with a unique number that is incremented for each new event so that it is possible to detect missing events as there will be a ‘gap’… -
Page 604
P44X/EN CS/Hb6 Cyber Security (CS) 15-20 MiCOM P40 Agile P441, P442, P444 Cell Available Interface In Setting Parameter Default Setting Setting Applicability file? col row 0 = Disabled or DNP3 OE*† 25 0B Enabled 1 = Enabled Yes, Not Attempts Remain… -
Page 605
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-1 HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY (Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only) -
Page 606
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-2 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444… -
Page 607
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-3 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch A2.x: First Model – P441/P442 (P444 not available) – Modbus/Kbus/IEC103 – 4 languages – Optos 48Vcc (Hardware=A) Documentation: TG 1.1671-C &… -
Page 608
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-4 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch A3.x : P444 model with 24 optos/32 outputs (Omron) – Universal optos – Italian Language – DNP3… -
Page 609
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-5 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch A4.x : Second Rear Port — more alarms — new application feature Second rear port/Slip frequency/Retrip CB/VTS phase selec/PPGround phase A4.0… -
Page 610
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch B1.x : New Hardware Platform (150 MHz coprocessor Board -2nd rear port-Triptime= 1,1 Cycle — 48 samples/T) & New functions (32N & 59N) New platform/model 080C/coprocessor board at 150 MHz/PW (32N)/CVTS B1.0… -
Page 611
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-7 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch C1.x : New Hardware Platform (New CPU Board 150MHz + Coprocessor Board 150MHz-2nd rear port-Triptime= 1,1Cycle — 48 samples/T) &… -
Page 612
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-8 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch C2.x : Idem C1.x with UCA2 (Ethernet optical support) & new function (49+NCIT) -
Page 613
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-9 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch C3.x : Idem C2.x with new communication protocol (IEC 61850-8-1) / UCA2 not supported – Model J only (Dual optos managed by default) Add IEC 61850-8-1 protocol / Zone reset&overlap/ WeakInfeed Echo+DEF/… -
Page 614
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-10 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch C4.x : Idem C3.x with new features (cells and DDB) Start ∆… -
Page 615
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-11 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Branch C7.x : Idem C5.x with Cyber security and “PSL Timers” features The following features are added: — Cyber security features — New “PSL timers” setting allowing remote time setting of timers in the PSL for P441 C7.A… -
Page 616
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-12 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch D1.x : Idem C5.6S with new HW suffix K: extended buttons, high break contacts, tri colors LEDs…… -
Page 617
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-13 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch D3.x : Idem D2.6 with new features (cells and DDB) -
Page 618
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-14 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue Branch D1.x : Idem D3.x with modified or new features (cells and DDB) -
Page 619
Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VH/Hb6 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 (VC) 16-15 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue The following features are modified: — V3<, V4<, V3> or V4> fault display (front panel), — V3<, V4<,n V3>… -
Page 620
P44x/EN VH/Hb6 Hardware / Software-Version (VC) 16-16 MiCOM P40 Agile P442, P444 Relay type: P441, P442, P444 Software Hardware Model Date of Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility version version number issue — 64 digitals in the DR. — V> % Hysteresis range from 0.5 to 2 and default is 2 i.e. 0.995 to 0.98 of Setting. -
Page 622
Imagination at work Grid Solutions St Leonards Building Redhill Business Park Stafford, ST16 1WT, UK +44 (0) 1785 250 070 www.gegridsolutions.com/contact © 2017 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances.
and energized, the DDB:’A/R TPAR Enable’ will enable the 3-pole… This manual is also suitable for:
P442P444
- Manuals
- Brands
- GE Manuals
- Control Unit
- MiCOM P40 Agile
- Technical manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
GE Energy Connections
Grid Solutions
MiCOM P40 Agile
P14D
Technical Manual
Feeder Management IED
Hardware Version: A
Software Version: 60
Publication Reference: P14D-TM-EN-8
Related Manuals for GE MiCOM P40 Agile
Summary of Contents for GE MiCOM P40 Agile
-
Page 1
GE Energy Connections Grid Solutions MiCOM P40 Agile P14D Technical Manual Feeder Management IED Hardware Version: A Software Version: 60 Publication Reference: P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter Overview Foreword Target Audience Typographical Conventions Nomenclature Compliance Product Scope Ordering Options Features and Functions Protection Functions Control Functions Measurement Functions Communication Functions Logic Diagrams Functional Overview Chapter 2 Safety Information Chapter Overview Health and Safety Symbols Installation, Commissioning and Servicing Lifting Hazards…
-
Page 4
Contents P14D 30TE Front Panel Keypad Liquid Crystal Display USB Port Fixed Function LEDs Function Keys Programable LEDs Chapter 4 Software Design Chapter Overview Software Design Overview System Level Software Real Time Operating System System Services Software Self-Diagnostic Software Startup Self-Testing 3.4.1 System Boot 3.4.2… -
Page 5
P14D Contents Chapter 6 Current Protection Functions Chapter Overview Overcurrent Protection Principles IDMT Characteristics 2.1.1 IEC 60255 IDMT Curves 2.1.2 European Standards 2.1.3 North American Standards 2.1.4 IEC and IEEE Inverse Curves 2.1.5 Differences Between the North american and European Standards 2.1.6 Programmable Curves Principles of Implementation… -
Page 6
Contents P14D 8.4.2 Icos phi / Isin phi characteristic 8.4.3 Directional SEF Logic Application Notes 8.5.1 Insulated Systems 8.5.2 Setting Guidelines (Insulated Systems) Cold Load Pickup Implementation CLP Logic Application Notes 9.3.1 CLP for Resistive Loads 9.3.2 CLP for Motor Feeders 9.3.3 CLP for Switch Onto Fault Conditions Selective Logic… -
Page 7
P14D Contents Chapter Overview REF Protection Principles Resistance-Earthed Star Windings Solidly-Earthed Star Windings Through Fault Stability Restricted Earth Fault Types 2.4.1 Low Impedance REF Principle 2.4.2 High Impedance REF Principle Restricted Earth Fault Protection Implementation Restricted Earth Fault Protection Implementation Low Impedance REF 3.2.1 Setting the Bias Characteristic… -
Page 8
Contents P14D 2.4.1 Directional Elements 2.4.2 Non-directional Elements Low Impedance REF Protection High Impedance REF Protection High Impedance Busbar Protection Use of Metrosil Non-linear Resistors Use of ANSI C-class CTs Chapter 10 Voltage Protection Functions Chapter Overview Undervoltage Protection Undervoltage Protection Implementation Undervoltage Protection Logic Application Notes 2.3.1… -
Page 9
P14D Contents Frequency Protection Overview Frequency Protection Implementation Underfrequency Protection Underfrequency Protection Implementation Underfrequency Protection Logic Application Notes 3.3.1 Setting Guidelines Overfrequency Protection Overfrequency Protection Implementation Overfrequency Protection Logic Application Notes 4.3.1 Setting Guidelines Independent R.O.C.O.F Protection Indepenent R.O.C.O.F Protection Implementation Independent R.O.C.O.F Protection Logic Application Notes 5.3.1… -
Page 10
Contents P14D 4.4.2 Sensitive Power Setting Guidelines Wattmetric Directional Earth Fault Protection WDE Implementation WDE Logic Chapter 13 Autoreclose Chapter Overview Introduction to 3-phase Autoreclose Implementation Autoreclose Function Inputs CB Healthy Block AR Reset Lockout AR Auto Mode AR LiveLine Mode Telecontrol Mode Live/Dead Ccts OK (Live/Dead Circuits OK) AR Sys Checks (AR System Checks) -
Page 11
P14D Contents 7.2.2 Trip Signal Logic 7.2.3 Blocking Signal Logic 7.2.4 Shots Exceeded Logic 7.2.5 AR Initiation Logic Blocking Instantaneous Protection for Selected Trips Blocking Instantaneous Protection for Lockouts Dead Time Control 7.5.1 AR CB Close Control AR System Checks Reclaim Timer Initiation Autoreclose Inhibit Autoreclose Lockout… -
Page 12
Contents P14D CB State Monitoring Logic Circuit Breaker Control CB Control using the IED Menu CB Control using the Hotkeys CB Control using the Function Keys CB Control using the Opto-inputs Remote CB Control Synchronisation Check CB Healthy Check CB Control Logic Pole Dead Function Pole Dead Logic System Checks… -
Page 13
P14D Contents 5.3.2 PSL for TCS Scheme 3 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 4 5.4.1 Resistor Values 5.4.2 PSL for TCS Scheme 4 Chapter 16 Digital I/O and PSL Configuration Chapter Overview Configuring Digital Inputs and Outputs Scheme Logic PSL Editor PSL Schemes PSL Scheme Version Control Configuring the Opto-Inputs… -
Page 14
Contents P14D 6.2.6 Cyclic Measurements 6.2.7 Commands 6.2.8 Test Mode 6.2.9 Disturbance Records 6.2.10 Command/Monitor Blocking 6.2.11 IEC 60870-5-103 Configuration DNP 3.0 6.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer 6.3.2 Object 1 Binary Inputs 6.3.3 Object 10 Binary Outputs 6.3.4 Object 20 Binary Counters 6.3.5 Object 30 Analogue Input 6.3.6… -
Page 15
P14D Contents NERC Compliance 3.1.1 CIP 002 3.1.2 CIP 003 3.1.3 CIP 004 3.1.4 CIP 005 3.1.5 CIP 006 3.1.6 CIP 007 3.1.7 CIP 008 3.1.8 CIP 009 IEEE 1686-2007 Cyber-Security Implementation NERC-Compliant Display Four-level Access 4.2.1 Blank Passwords 4.2.2 Password Rules 4.2.3 Access Level DDBs… -
Page 16
Contents P14D Chapter 20 Commissioning Instructions Chapter Overview General Guidelines Commissioning Test Menu Opto I/P Status Cell (Opto-input Status) Relay O/P Status Cell (Relay Output Status) Test Port Status Cell Monitor Bit 1 to 8 Cells Test Mode Cell Test Pattern Cell Contact Test Cell Test LEDs Cell Test Autoreclose Cell… -
Page 17
P14D Contents Chapter Overview Maintenance Maintenance Checks 2.1.1 Alarms 2.1.2 Opto-isolators 2.1.3 Output Relays 2.1.4 Measurement Accuracy Replacing the Unit Cleaning Troubleshooting Self-Diagnostic Software Power-up Errors Error Message or Code on Power-up Out of Service LED on at Power-up Error Code during Operation Mal-operation during testing 3.6.1 Failure of Output Contacts… -
Page 18
Contents P14D Negative Sequence Voltage Protection Rate of Change of Voltage Protection Performance of Frequency Protection Functions Overfrequency Protection Underfrequency Protection Supervised Rate of Change of Frequency Protection Independent Rate of Change of Frequency Protection Average Rate of Change of Frequency Protection Load Restoration Power Protection Functions Overpower / Underpower Protection… -
Page 19
P14D Contents 15.1 Insulation 15.2 Creepage Distances and Clearances 15.3 High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand 15.4 Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Electromagnetic Compatibility 16.1 1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test 16.2 Damped Oscillatory Test 16.3 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge 16.4 Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements 16.5 Surge Withstand Capability 16.6… -
Page 20
Contents P14D xviii P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 21
Table of Figures Figure 1: Key to logic diagrams Figure 2: Functional Overview Figure 3: Hardware design overview Figure 4: Exploded view of IED Figure 5: 20TE rear panel Figure 6: 30TE Three-MIDOS block rear panel Figure 7: 30TE Two-MIDOS block + communications rear panel Figure 8: 30TE Two-MIDOS block + blanking plate Figure 9:… -
Page 22
Table of Figures P14D Figure 39: Distribution of currents during a Phase C fault Figure 40: Phasors for a phase C earth fault in a Petersen Coil earthed system Figure 41: Zero sequence network showing residual currents Figure 42: Phase C earth fault in Petersen Coil earthed system: practical case with resistance present Figure 43: Non-directional SEF logic… -
Page 23
P14D Table of Figures Figure 78: High Impedance REF Connection Figure 79: REF bias characteristic Figure 80: Star winding, resistance earthed Figure 81: Percentage of winding protected Figure 82: Low Impedance REF Scaling Factor Figure 83: Hi-Z REF protection for a grounded star winding Figure 84: Hi-Z REF protection for a delta winding Figure 85:… -
Page 24
Table of Figures P14D Figure 118: Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current IDL Figure 119: Underfrequency logic (single stage) Figure 120: Overfrequency logic (single stage) Figure 121: Power system segregation based upon frequency measurements Figure 122: Independent rate of change of frequency logic (single stage) Figure 123: Frequency-supervised rate of change of frequency logic (single stage) -
Page 25
P14D Table of Figures Figure 158: Check Synchronisation vector diagram Figure 159: System Check logic Figure 160: System Check PSL Figure 161: Representation of typical feeder bay Figure 162: Switch Status logic Figure 163: Switch Control logic Figure 164: DC Supply Monitor zones Figure 165: DC Supply Monitor logic Figure 166:… -
Page 26
Table of Figures P14D Figure 198: MiDOS terminal block Figure 199: Earth link for cable screen Figure 200: 20TE case dimensions Figure 201: 30TE case dimensions Figure 202: RP1 physical connection Figure 203: Remote communication using K-bus xxiv P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 27: Chapter 1 Introduction
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION…
-
Page 28: Rear Serial Port
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 29: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 1 — Introduction CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides some general information about the technical manual and an introduction to the device(s) described in this technical manual. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Foreword Product Scope Features and Functions Logic Diagrams Functional Overview P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 30: Foreword
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D FOREWORD This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of General Electric’s P14D, as well as a comprehensive set of instructions for using the device. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are already familiar with protection engineering and have experience in this discipline.
-
Page 31: Nomenclature
P14D Chapter 1 — Introduction NOMENCLATURE Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product- specific terms used by General Electric. The first instance of any acronym or term used in a particular chapter is explained.
-
Page 32: Product Scope
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D PRODUCT SCOPE The P14D feeder management IED has been designed for the protection of a wide range of overhead lines and underground cables. The P14D provides integral directional and non-directional overcurrent, overvoltage and earth-fault protection and is suitable for application on solidly earthed, impedance earthed, Petersen coil earthed, and isolated systems.
-
Page 33: Features And Functions
P14D Chapter 1 — Introduction FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The P14D models offer the following protection functions: ANSI IEC 61850 Protection Function P14DA P14DB P14DG P14DH P14DL P14DZ Undercurrent detection (low load) NgcPTOC Negative sequence overcurrent 46BC Broken Conductor ThmPTTR Thermal Overload 50 SOTF…
-
Page 34: Control Functions
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D ANSI IEC 61850 Protection Function P14DA P14DB P14DG P14DH P14DL P14DZ Check synchronising Phase Directional Power Sensitive power Load Encroachment supervision (Load Blinders) RREC Autoreclose (3 phases) 4 shots 4 shots 21FL Fault Locator Frequency supervised rate of change 81RF DfpPFRC of frequency…
-
Page 35: Measurement Functions
P14D Chapter 1 — Introduction MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS The device offers the following measurement functions: Measurement Function Details Measurements Measured currents and calculated sequence ● and RMS currents (Exact range of measurements depend on the device model) Measured voltages and calculated sequence ●…
-
Page 36: Logic Diagrams
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D LOGIC DIAGRAMS This technical manual contains many logic diagrams, which should help to explain the functionality of the device. Although this manual has been designed to be as specific as possible to the chosen product, it may contain diagrams, which have elements applicable to other products.
-
Page 37: Functional Overview
P14D Chapter 1 — Introduction FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 50BF 46BC SOTF 81RF 21FL 81RAV 81df/dt Digital I/O Communication Measurements Disturbance Opto- Relay Local records IRIG-B Ethernet RS485 Fault records inputs outputs V00001 Figure 2: Functional Overview P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 38
Chapter 1 — Introduction P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 39: Chapter 2 Safety Information
CHAPTER 2 SAFETY INFORMATION…
-
Page 40
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 41: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides information about the safe handling of the equipment. The equipment must be properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition and to keep personnel safe at all times. You must be familiar with information contained in this chapter before unpacking, installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
-
Page 42: Health And Safety
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D HEALTH AND SAFETY Personnel associated with the equipment must be familiar with the contents of this Safety Information. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment. Improper use of the equipment and failure to observe warning notices will endanger personnel.
-
Page 43: Symbols
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information SYMBOLS Throughout this manual you will come across the following symbols. You will also see these symbols on parts of the equipment. Caution: Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment Warning: Risk of electric shock…
-
Page 44: Installation, Commissioning And Servicing
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING LIFTING HAZARDS Many injuries are caused by: Lifting heavy objects ● Lifting things incorrectly ● ● Pushing or pulling heavy objects Using the same muscles repetitively ● Plan carefully, identify any possible hazards and determine how best to move the product. Look at other ways of moving the load to avoid manual handling.
-
Page 45: Ul/Csa/Cul Requirements
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information Caution: NEVER look into optical fibres or optical output connections. Always use optical power meters to determine operation or signal level. Warning: Testing may leave capacitors charged to dangerous voltage levels. Discharge capacitors by rediucing test voltages to zero before disconnecting test leads. Caution: Operate the equipment within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
-
Page 46: Equipment Connections
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D Caution: Digital input circuits should be protected by a high rupture capacity NIT or TIA fuse with maximum rating of 16 A. for safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used. Caution: CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages…
-
Page 47: Pre-Energisation Checklist
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information Caution: Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of stud-connected PCTs. Caution: The recommended minimum PCT wire size is 2.5 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 230 V (e.g. Europe) and 3.3 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 110 V (e.g. North America).
-
Page 48: Upgrading/Servicing
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D Note: For most Alstom equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination is automatically shorted if the module is removed. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required. Check the equipment documentation and wiring diagrams first to see if this applies.
-
Page 49: Decommissioning And Disposal
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL Caution: Before decommissioning, completely isolate the equipment power supplies (both poles of any dc supply). The auxiliary supply input may have capacitors in parallel, which may still be charged. To avoid electric shock, discharge the capacitors using the external terminals before decommissioning.
-
Page 50: Regulatory Compliance
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D REGULATORY COMPLIANCE Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a technical file. EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonised standard(s) or conformit assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the EMC directive.
-
Page 51
P14D Chapter 2 — Safety Information Where: ‘II’ Equipment Group: Industrial. ‘(2)G’ High protection equipment category, for control of equipment in gas atmospheres in Zone 1 and 2. This equipment (with parentheses marking around the zone number) is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere. -
Page 52
Chapter 2 — Safety Information P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 53: Chapter 3 Hardware Design
CHAPTER 3 HARDWARE DESIGN…
-
Page 54
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 55: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides information about the product’s hardware design. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Hardware Architecture Mechanical Implementation Terminal Connections Front Panel P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 56: Hardware Architecture
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE The main components comprising devices based on the P40Agile platform are as follows: The housing, consisting of a front panel and connections at the rear ● The Main processor module consisting of the main CPU (Central Processing Unit), memory and an interface ●…
-
Page 57: Mechanical Implementation
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design MECHANICAL IMPLEMENTATION All products based on the P40Agile platform have common hardware architecture. The hardware comprises two main parts; the cradle and the housing. The cradle consists of the front panel which is attached to a carrier board into which all of the hardware boards and modules are connected.
-
Page 58: 20Te Rear Panel
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D Case width (TE) Case width (mm) Equivalent K series 20TE 102.4 mm (4 inches) KCGG140/142 30TE 154.2 mm (6 inches) KCEG140/142 20TE REAR PANEL The 20TE rear panel consists of two MIDOS heavy duty terminal blocks. Figure 5: 20TE rear panel 30TE REAR PANEL The 30TE rear panel consists of either:…
-
Page 59: Figure 6: 30Te Three-Midos Block Rear Panel
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design Figure 6: 30TE Three-MIDOS block rear panel Figure 7: 30TE Two-MIDOS block + communications rear panel P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 60: Figure 8: 30Te Two-Midos Block + Blanking Plate
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D Figure 8: 30TE Two-MIDOS block + blanking plate P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 61: Terminal Connections
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design TERMINAL CONNECTIONS I/O OPTIONS Component I/O option A I/O option B I/O option C I/O option D I/O option E I/O option F (1 group of 3 (2 groups of 3 (1 group of 3, 1 (1 group of 3 (1 group of 3) (1 group of 3…
-
Page 62: Front Panel
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D FRONT PANEL 20TE FRONT PANEL Figure 9: Front panel (20TE) The figures show the front panels for the 20TE variant. It consists of: LCD display ● Keypad ● ● USB port 4 x fixed function tri-colour LEDs ●…
-
Page 63: 30Te Front Panel
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design 30TE FRONT PANEL Figure 10: Front panel (30TE) The figures show the front panels for the 30TE variant. It consists of: LCD display ● Keypad ● ● USB port 4 x fixed function tri-colour LEDs ●…
-
Page 64: Liquid Crystal Display
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D A clear key for clearing the last command A read key for viewing larger blocks of text (arrow keys now used for scrolling) 2 hot keys for scrolling through the default display and for control of setting groups.
-
Page 65: Fixed Function Leds
P14D Chapter 3 — Hardware Design FIXED FUNCTION LEDS Four fixed-function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel indicate the following conditions. Trip (Red) switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is ●…
-
Page 66
Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 67: Chapter 4 Software Design
CHAPTER 4 SOFTWARE DESIGN…
-
Page 68
Chapter 4 — Software Design P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 69: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 4 — Software Design CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter describes the software design of the IED. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Software Design Overview System Level Software Platform Software Protection and Control Functions P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 70: Software Design Overview
Chapter 4 — Software Design P14D SOFTWARE DESIGN OVERVIEW The range of products based on the P40 Agile platform can be conceptually categorised into several elements as follows: The system level software ● The platform software ● The protection and control software ●…
-
Page 71: System Level Software
P14D Chapter 4 — Software Design SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM The real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the various tasks. This ensures that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system also plays a part in controlling the communication between the software tasks.
-
Page 72: System Level Software Initialisation
Chapter 4 — Software Design P14D 3.4.2 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE INITIALISATION The initialization process initializes the processor registers and interrupts, starts the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starts the real-time operating system and creates and starts the supervisor task.
-
Page 73: Platform Software
P14D Chapter 4 — Software Design PLATFORM SOFTWARE The platform software has three main functions: To control the logging of records generated by the protection software, including alarms, events, faults, and ● maintenance records To store and maintain a database of all of the settings in non-volatile memory ●…
-
Page 74: Protection And Control Functions
Chapter 4 — Software Design P14D PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS The protection and control software processes all of the protection elements and measurement functions. To achieve this it has to communicate with the system services software, the platform software as well as organise its own operations.
-
Page 75: Programmable Scheme Logic
P14D Chapter 4 — Software Design ´ (fundamental frequency)/2 (samples per cycle) At 24 samples per cycle, this would be nominally 600 Hz for a 50 Hz system, or 720 Hz for a 60 Hz system. The following figure shows the nominal frequency response of the anti-alias filter and the Fourier filter for a 24- sample single cycle fourier algorithm acting on the fundamental component: Ideal anti-alias filter response Fourier response without…
-
Page 76: Disturbance Recorder
Chapter 4 — Software Design P14D may be triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. For more information, see the Monitoring and Control chapter. DISTURBANCE RECORDER The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task.
-
Page 77: Chapter 5 Configuration
CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURATION…
-
Page 78
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 79: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration CHAPTER OVERVIEW Each product has different configuration parameters according to the functions it has been designed to perform. There is, however, a common methodology used across the entire product series to set these parameters. Some of the communications setup can only be carried out using the HMI, and cannot be carried out using settings applications software.
-
Page 80: Settings Application Software
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D SETTINGS APPLICATION SOFTWARE To configure this device you will need to use the Settings Application Software. The settings application software used in this range of IEDs is called MiCOM S1 Agile. It is a collection of software tools, which is used for setting up and managing the IEDs.
-
Page 81: Using The Hmi Panel
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration USING THE HMI PANEL Using the HMI, you can: Display and modify settings ● View the digital I/O signal status ● ● Display measurements Display fault records ● Reset fault and alarm indications ● The keypad provides full access to the device functionality using a range of menu options. The information is displayed on the LCD.
-
Page 82: Navigating The Hmi Panel
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D Note: As the LCD display has a resolution of 16 characters by 3 lines, some of the information is in a condensed mnemonic form. NAVIGATING THE HMI PANEL The cursor keys are used to navigate the menus. These keys have an auto-repeat function if held down continuously.
-
Page 83: Default Display
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration Even though the device itself should be in full working order when you first start it, an alarm could still be present, for example, if there is no network connection for a device fitted with a network card. If this is the case, you can read the alarm by pressing the ‘Read’ key.
-
Page 84: Default Display Navigation
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D Access Level For example: Access Level HOTKEY In addition to the above, there are also displays for the system voltages, currents, power and frequency etc., depending on the device model. DEFAULT DISPLAY NAVIGATION The following diagram is an example of the default display navigation. In this example, we have used a cyber- secure model.
-
Page 85: Password Entry
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration Note: Whenever the IED has an uncleared alarm the default display is replaced by the text Alarms/ Faults present. You cannot override this default display. However, you can enter the menu structure from the default display, even if the display shows the Alarms/Faults present message.
-
Page 86: Menu Structure
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D Press Clear To Reset Alarms To clear all alarm messages, press the Clear key. To return to the display showing alarms or faults present, and leave the alarms uncleared, press the Read key. Depending on the password configuration settings, you may need to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared.
-
Page 87: Changing The Settings
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration Setting Column Description Sys Fn Links (Row 03) Third setting within first column … … … VIEW RECORDS Second Column definition Select Event [0…n] First setting within second column Menu Cell Ref Second setting within second column Time &…
-
Page 88: Direct Access (The Hotkey Menu)
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D Note: For the protection group and disturbance recorder settings, if the menu time-out occurs before the changes have been confirmed, the setting values are discarded. Control and support settings, howeverr, are updated immediately after they are entered, without the Update settings? prompt.
-
Page 89: Circuit Breaker Control
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration To access the hotkey menu from the default display, you press the key directly below the HOTKEY text on the LCD. The following screen will appear. ¬User32 STG GP® HOTKEY MENU EXIT Press the right cursor key twice to get to the first control input, or the left cursor key to get to the last control input. ¬STP GP User02®…
-
Page 90
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D The first cell down in the FUNCTION KEYS column is the Fn Key Status cell. This contains a binary string, which represents the function key commands. Their status can be read from this binary string. FUNCTION KEYS Fn Key Status 0000000000… -
Page 91: Date And Time Configuration
P14D Chapter 5 — Configuration DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION The date and time setting will normally be updated automatically by the chosen UTC (Universal Time Co- ordination) time synchronisation mechanism when the device is in service. You can also set the date and time manually using the Date/Time cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
-
Page 92: Settings Group Selection
Chapter 5 — Configuration P14D SETTINGS GROUP SELECTION You can select the setting group using opto inputs, a menu selection, and for some models the hotkey menu or function keys. You choose which method using the Setting Group setting in the CONFIGURATION column. There are two possibilities;…
-
Page 93: Chapter 6 Current Protection Functions
CHAPTER 6 CURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS…
-
Page 94
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 95: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions CHAPTER OVERVIEW The P14D provides a wide range of current protection functions. This chapter describes the operation of these functions including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Overcurrent Protection Principles Phase Overcurrent Protection…
-
Page 96: Overcurrent Protection Principles
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PRINCIPLES Most electrical power system faults result in an overcurrent of one kind or another. It is the job of protection devices, formerly known as ‘relays’ but now known as Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) to protect the power system from faults.
-
Page 97: Iec 60255 Idmt Curves
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions 2.1.1 IEC 60255 IDMT CURVES There are four well-known variants of this characteristic: Standard Inverse ● Very inverse ● Extremely inverse ● UK Long Time inverse ● These equations and corresponding curves governing these characteristics are very well known in the power industry.
-
Page 98
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D For cases where the generation is practically constant and discrimination with low tripping times is difficult to obtain, because of the low impedance per line section, an extremely inverse relay can be very useful since only a small difference of current is necessary to obtain an adequate time difference. -
Page 99: European Standards
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions 1000.00 100.00 Long Time Inverse ( 10.00 Standard Inverse (SI) 1.00 Very Inverse (VI) Extremely Inverse (EI) 0.10 Current (multiples of I E00600 Figure 15: IEC 60255 IDMT curves 2.1.2 EUROPEAN STANDARDS The IEC 60255 IDMT Operate equation is: β…
-
Page 100: North American Standards
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D b constant a constant Curve Description L constant IEC Very Inverse Operate 13.5 IEC Very Inverse Reset 50.92 IEC Extremely Inverse Operate IEC Extremely Inverse Reset 44.1 3.03 UK Long Time Inverse Operate* BPN (EDF) Operate* 1000 0.655…
-
Page 101
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions The constant values for the IEEE curves are as follows: b constant a constant Curve Description L constant IEEE Moderately Inverse Operate 0.0515 0.02 0.114 IEEE Moderately Inverse Reset 4.85 IEEE Very Inverse Operate 19.61 0.491 IEEE Very Inverse Reset… -
Page 102: Iec And Ieee Inverse Curves
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 2.1.4 IEC AND IEEE INVERSE CURVES IEC Standard Inverse Curve IEC Very Inverse Curve 1000 1000 0.025 0.025 0.075 0.075 0.100 0.100 0.300 0.300 0.500 0.500 0.700 0.700 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.000 1.200 1.200 0.01 0.01…
-
Page 103: Differences Between The North American And European Standards
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions IEEE Very Inverse Curve IEEE Extremely Inverse Curve 10000 10000 0.05 0.05 1000 1000 0.01 0.01 Current in Multiples of Setting Current in Multiples of Setting E00759 Figure 18: IEEE very and extremely inverse curves 2.1.5 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE NORTH AMERICAN AND EUROPEAN STANDARDS The IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting.
-
Page 104: Timer Hold Facility
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Energising quantity Start signal IDMT/ DT Threshold & & & Trip Signal Function inhibit Stage Blocking signals Timer Settings Stage Blocking settings Voltage Directional Check Current Timer Blocking signals Timer Blocking settings V00654 Figure 19: Principle of protection function implementation An energising quantity is either a voltage input from a system voltage transformer, a current input from a system current transformer or another quantity derived from one or both of these.
-
Page 105
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions similar way to an electromechanical relay. If you set the hold timer to zero, the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously as soon as the current falls below a specified percentage of the current setting (typically 95%). -
Page 106: Phase Overcurrent Protection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Phase current faults are faults where fault current flows between two or more phases of a power system. The fault current may be between the phase conductors only or, between two or more phase conductors and earth. Although not as common as earth faults (single phase to earth), phase faults are typically more severe.
-
Page 107: Non-Directional Overcurrent Logic
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions NON-DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC I>1 Start A & I>1 Current Set & I>1 Trip A IDMT/DT IA 2H Start & Timer Settings I> Blocking 2H Blocks I>1 2H 1PH Block I>1 Start B & I>1 Current Set &…
-
Page 108: Directional Element
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT If fault current can flow in both directions through a protected location, you will need to use a directional overcurrent element to determine the direction of the fault. Once the direction has been determined the device can decide whether to allow tripping or to block tripping.
-
Page 109: Figure 21: Directional Trip Angles
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions V00747 Figure 21: Directional trip angles For close up three-phase faults, all three voltages will collapse to zero and no healthy phase voltages will be present. For this reason, the device includes a synchronous polarisation feature that stores the pre-fault voltage information and continues to apply this to the directional overcurrent elements for a time period of a few seconds.
-
Page 110: Directional Overcurrent Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 3.3.1 DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC I>1 Start A & I>1 Current Set & I>1 Trip A IDMT/DT & IA 2H Start & I> Blocking 2H Block I>1 Timer Settings 2H 1PH BLOCK I2H Any Start &…
-
Page 111: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions APPLICATION NOTES 3.5.1 PARALLEL FEEDERS 33 kV OC/EF OC/EF SBEF DOC/DEF DOC/DEF OC/EF OC/EF 11 kV OC/EF Loads E00603 Figure 23: Typical distribution system using parallel transformers In the application shown in the diagram, a fault at ‘F’ could result in the operation of both R3 and R4 resulting in the loss of supply to the 11 kV busbar.
-
Page 112: Ring Main Arrangements
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 3.5.2 RING MAIN ARRANGEMENTS Source 2.1s 2.1s 0.1s 0.1s Load Load 1.7s Load 1.7s Load 0.5s 0.5s Load 1.3s 1.3s Load 0.9s 0.9s E00604 Figure 24: Typical ring main with associated overcurrent protection In a ring main arrangement, current may flow in either direction through the various device locations, therefore directional overcurrent devices are needed to achieve correct discrimination.
-
Page 113: Setting Guidelines (Directional Element)
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions This example is for a device feeding a LV switchboard and makes the following assumptions: CT Ratio = 500/1 ● ● Full load current of circuit = 450A Slowest downstream protection = 100A Fuse ●…
-
Page 114: Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Element
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERCURRENT ELEMENT An overcurrent protection scheme is co-ordinated throughout a system such that cascaded operation is achieved. This means that if for some reason a downstream circuit breaker fails to trip for a fault condition, the next upstream circuit breaker should trip.
-
Page 115: Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Protection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions 4.1.2 VOLTAGE RESTRAINED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION In Voltage Restrained Operation (VRO) mode the effective operating current of the protection element is continuously variable as the applied voltage varies between two voltage thresholds. This protection mode is considered to be better suited to applications where the generator is connected to the system via a generator transformer.
-
Page 116: Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERCURRENT LOGIC V Dep OC Status VCO I>1 & VRO I>1 Vdep OC Start AB V Dep OC V<1 Set I>1 Current Set Applied Current × Threshold V Dep OC k Set &…
-
Page 117
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Example If the overcurrent device has a setting of 160% In, but the minimum fault current for the remote fault condition is only 80% In, then the required k factor is given by: 0 42 ×… -
Page 118: Current Setting Threshold Selection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D CURRENT SETTING THRESHOLD SELECTION The Phase Overcurrent protection threshold setting can be influenced by the Cold Load Pickup (CLP)and the Voltage Dependent Overcurrent (V DepOC) functions, should this functionality be used. The Overcurrent function selects the threshold setting according to the following diagram: Start Use the threshold setting Does a Voltage Dependent…
-
Page 119: Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION When applying standard phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set significantly higher than the maximum load current. This limits the element’s sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults.
-
Page 120: Non-Directional Negative Sequence Overcurrent Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D NON-DIRECTIONAL NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT LOGIC I2>1 Start & I2>1 Current Set & I2>1 Trip IDMT/DT CTS Block Timer Settings I 2> Inhibit I2 H Any Start Note: This diagram does not show all stages . Other stages follow similar principles.
-
Page 121: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted negative sequence voltage (–V2), in order to be at the centre of the directional characteristic. For the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate, the device must detect a polarising voltage above a minimum threshold, I2>…
-
Page 122
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D For the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate, the device must detect a polarising voltage above a minimum threshold, I2> V2pol Set. This must be set in excess of any steady state negative phase sequence voltage. -
Page 123: Earth Fault Protection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions EARTH FAULT PROTECTION Earth faults are overcurrent faults where the fault current flows to earth. Earth faults are the most common type of fault. Earth faults can be measured directly from the system by means of: ●…
-
Page 124: Non-Directional Earth Fault Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D NON-DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT LOGIC IN2>1 Start & IN2>1 Current & IDMT/DT IN2>1 Trip CTS Block Timer Settings Not applicable for IN1 IN2> Inhibit Note: This diagram shows the logic for IN2 (derived earth fault ). The logic I2H Any Start for IN1 (measured earth fault ) follows the same principles, but with no CTS blocking.
-
Page 125: Directional Element
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Note: Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the «ΙN>» setting, the actual current threshold is a different setting called «IDG Ιs». The «IDG Ιs» setting is set as a multiple of «ΙN>». Note: When using an IDG Operate characteristic, DT is always used with a value of zero for the Rest characteristic.
-
Page 126: Figure 33: Directional Angles
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Note: Residual voltage is nominally 180° out of phase with residual current. Consequently, the DEF elements are polarised from the «-Vres» quantity. This 180° phase shift is automatically introduced within the device. The directional criteria with residual voltage polarisation is given below: Directional forward (Ð…
-
Page 127: Negative Sequence Polarisation
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions 7.4.1.1 DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT LOGIC WITH RESIDUAL VOLTAGE POLARISATION IN1 > DIRECTIONAL IN1> VNpol Set Low Current Threshold Directional To EF logic check IN1>1 Char Angle IN1>1 Trip Angle VTS Slow Block Note: This diagram shows the logic for IN1 (measured earth fault ). The logic for IN2 (derived earth fault ) follows similar principles.
-
Page 128: Application Notes
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D V00749 Figure 35: Directional angles 7.4.2.1 DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT LOGIC WITH NPS POLARISATION IN1 > DIRECTIONAL IN1> V2 pol Set IN1> I2pol Set Directional To EF logic check IN1>1 Char Angle IN1>1 Trip Angle VTS Slow Block Note: This diagram shows the logic for IN 1 (measured earth fault ).
-
Page 129: Peterson Coil Earthed Systems
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions 7.5.2 PETERSON COIL EARTHED SYSTEMS A Petersen Coil earthing system is used in cases of high impedance earthing. Petersen Coil earthed systems (also called compensated or resonant systems) are commonly found in areas where the system consists mainly of rural overhead lines.
-
Page 130: Figure 39: Distribution Of Currents During A Phase C Fault
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D V00632 Figure 39: Distribution of currents during a Phase C fault Assuming that no resistance is present in X or X , the resulting phasor diagrams will be as shown in the figure below: = -3V = 3V…
-
Page 131: Figure 41: Zero Sequence Network Showing Residual Currents
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions The magnitude of the residual current I is equal to three times the steady-state charging current per phase. On the faulted feeder, the residual current is equal to I (C). This is shown in the zero sequence network shown in the following figure: Faulty feeder = Residual current on faulted feeder…
-
Page 132: Setting Guidelines (Compensated Networks)
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Directionality is usually implemented using a Wattmetric function, or a transient earth fault detection function (TEFD), rather than a simple directional function, since they are more sensitive. 7.5.3 SETTING GUIDELINES (COMPENSATED NETWORKS) The directional setting should be such that the forward direction is looking down into the protected feeder (away from the busbar), with a 0°…
-
Page 133: Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION With some earth faults, the fault current flowing to earth is limited by either intentional resistance (as is the case with some HV systems) or unintentional resistance (e.g. in very dry conditions and where the substrate is high resistance, such as sand or rock).
-
Page 134: Epatr B Curve
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D SEF protection can follow the same IDMT characteristics as described in the Overcurrent Protection Principles section. Please refer to this section for details of IDMT characteristics. EPATR B CURVE The EPATR B curve is commonly used for time-delayed Sensitive Earth Fault protection in certain markets. This curve is only available in the Sensitive Earth Fault protection stages 1 and 2.
-
Page 135: Wattmetric Characteristic
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Unearthed Systems Compensated Systems Solidly Earthed Systems Resistance-Earthed Systems (insulated systems) (Petersen coil) Directional SEF Directional SEF Directional SEF Directional SEF Core-balanced INsin(j) INcos(j) INcos(j) characteristic characteristic characteristic Directional Core-balanced Wattmetric Wattmetric Earth Fault VN x IN sin (j) VN x IN cos (j) (reactive power)
-
Page 136: Icos Phi / Isin Phi Characteristic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D The power setting is called PN> and is calculated using residual quantities. The formula for operation is as follows: The PN> setting corresponds to: f f f f cos( ) = 9V cos( where: f = Angle between the Polarising Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current…
-
Page 137: Figure 47: Operating Characteristic For Icos
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Faulted Icos( 1) Feeder Polarising Voltage Forward Operation Icos( 2) Healthy Feeder Reverse Reverse Operation Operation E00618 Figure 47: Operating characteristic for Icos The diagram illustrates the method of discrimination when the real (cosf ) component is considered. Faults close to the polarising voltage will have a higher magnitude than those close to the operating boundary.
-
Page 138: Directional Sef Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 8.4.3 DIRECTIONAL SEF LOGIC SEF Options ISEF ISEFsin(phi) ISEF>1 Start ISEFcos(phi) & ISEF>1 Current & & ISEF>1 Trip IDMT/DT Inhibit SEF I2H Any Start Timer Settings ISEF> Blocking & 2 H Blocks ISEF>1 ISEF>1 Direction VN.ISEF.cos phi &…
-
Page 139: Figure 49: Current Distribution In An Insulated System With C Phase Fault
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions currents that occurs under earth fault conditions. A core balanced CT must be used for this application. This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs.
-
Page 140: Setting Guidelines (Insulated Systems)
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Restrain Vapf Operate Vcpf Vbpf Vres (= 3Vo) An RCA setting of ±90º shifts the IR3 = (IH1 + IH2) “centre of the characteristic” to here E00628 Figure 50: Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault The current imbalance detected by a core balanced current transformer on the healthy feeders is the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1.
-
Page 141: Figure 51: Positioning Of Core Balance Current Transformers
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Cable gland Cable box Cable gland/shealth earth connection “Incorrect” No operation “Correct” Operation E00614 Figure 51: Positioning of core balance current transformers If the cable sheath is terminated at the cable gland and directly earthed at that point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will not result in any unbalanced current in the core balance CT.
-
Page 142: Cold Load Pickup
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D COLD LOAD PICKUP When a feeder circuit breaker is closed in order to energise a load, the current levels that flow for a period of time following energisation may be far greater than the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings that have been applied to provide overcurrent protection may not be suitable during this period of energisation (cold load), as they may initiate undesired tripping of the circuit breaker.
-
Page 143: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions The CLP Operation signal indicates that CLP logic is in operation. This only happens when CLP is enabled AND CLP is initiated either externally or from a CB Open condition after the tcold period has elapsed. The CLP Operation indicator goes low when CLP is disabled or when the external CLP trigger is removed or when there is a CB closed condition.
-
Page 144: Selective Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D SELECTIVE LOGIC With Selective Logic you can use the Start signals to control the time delays of upstream IEDs, as an alternative to simply blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving non-cascading types of overcurrent scheme.
-
Page 145
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Note: The Auto-reclose function outputs two signals that block protection, namely; AR Blk Main Prot and AR Blk SEF Prot. AR Blk Main Prot is common to Phase Overcurrent, Earth Fault 1 and Earth Fault 2, whereas AR Blk SEF Prot is used for SEF protection. -
Page 146: Timer Setting Selection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D TIMER SETTING SELECTION The timer settings used depend on whether there is a Selective Overcurrent condition or a Cold Load Pickup condition (if this functionality is used). The protection function selects the settings according to the following flow diagram: Start Use the timer settings defined in…
-
Page 147: Thermal Overload Protection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION The heat generated within an item of plant is the resistive loss. The thermal time characteristic is therefore based on the equation I Rt. Over-temperature conditions occur when currents in excess of their maximum rating are allowed to flow for a period of time.
-
Page 148: Thermal Overload Protection Implementation
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 12.3 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION The device incorporates a current-based thermal characteristic, using RMS load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. Thermal Overload Protection is implemented in the THERMAL OVERLOAD column of the relevant settings group.
-
Page 149: Figure 56: Spreadsheet Calculation For Dual Time Constant Thermal Characteristic
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Figures based on equation E00728 Figure 56: Spreadsheet calculation for dual time constant thermal characteristic 100000 Time constant 1 = 5 mins 10000 Time constant 2 = 120 mins Pre-overload current = 0.9 pu Thermal setting = 1 Amp 1000 Current as a Multiple of Thermal Setting…
-
Page 150: Setting Guidelines For Single Time Constant Characteristic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Note: The thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information. 12.5.2 SETTING GUIDELINES FOR SINGLE TIME CONSTANT CHARACTERISTIC The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e.
-
Page 151
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 152: Broken Conductor Protection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION One type of unbalanced fault is the ‘Series’ or ‘Open Circuit’ fault. This type of fault can arise from, among other things, broken conductors. Series faults do not cause an increase in phase current and so cannot be detected by overcurrent protection.
-
Page 153
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Note: A minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful operation. Since sensitive settings have been employed, we can expect that the element will operate for any unbalanced condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). For this reason, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protection devices. -
Page 154: Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D BLOCKED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION With Blocked Overcurrent schemes, you connect the start contacts from downstream IEDs to the timer blocking inputs of upstream IEDs. This allows identical current and time settings to be used on each of the IEDs in the scheme, as the device nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and so trips discriminatively.
-
Page 155: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions CB Fail Alarm & Remove IN> Start IN/SEF>Blk Start Enabled Disabled & IN1>1 Start IN1>2 Start IN1>3 Start IN1>4 Start IN2>1 Start IN2>2 Start IN2>3 Start IN2>4 Start ISEF>1 Start ISEF>2 Start ISEF>3 Start ISEF>4 Start V00649 Figure 60: Blocked Earth Fault logic…
-
Page 156: Figure 62: Simple Busbar Blocking Scheme Characteristics
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 10.0 Incomer IDMT element Time IDMT margin (secs) Feeder IDMT element Incomer high set element 0.08 Time to block Feeder start contact 0.01 10.0 100.0 Current (kA) E00637 Figure 62: Simple busbar blocking scheme characteristics For further guidance on the use of blocked busbar schemes, refer to General Electric.
-
Page 157: Second Harmonic Blocking
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions SECOND HARMONIC BLOCKING When a transformer is initially connected to a source of AC voltage, there may be a substantial surge of current through the primary winding called inrush current. Inrush current is a regularly occurring phenomenon and should not be considered a fault, as we do not wish the protection device to issue a trip command whenever a transformer, or machine is switched on.
-
Page 158: Second Harmonic Blocking Logic (Poc Input)
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 15.2 SECOND HARMONIC BLOCKING LOGIC (POC INPUT) & IA fundamental & I2H Any Start I>Lift 2H & & IA2H Start Low current (hard-coded) IB2H Start IA 2 harm / IA fund IA 2ndHarm IC2H Start 2 ndHarm Thresh IA fundamental…
-
Page 159: Load Blinders
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions LOAD BLINDERS Load blinding is a mechanism, where protection elements are prevented from tripping under heavy load, but healthy conditions. In the past this mechanism was mainly used for transmission systems and was rarely needed at distribution voltage levels.
-
Page 160: Load Blinder Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D The three phase mode uses positive sequence impedance (Z1). The three phase mode uses both the negative sequence overcurrent threshold (Blinder I2>Block) and the undervoltage threshold (Blinder V< Block) to block the function. 16.2 LOAD BLINDER LOGIC Z1 Angle…
-
Page 161: Figure 66: Load Blinder Logic Phase A
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Z Angle Pick up & Cycles FWD Z Angle & A FWD Blinder Drop off Cycles Z1 Magnitude FWD Z Impedance A LoadBlinder Blinder Mode Forward Both Z Angle Pick up Cycles & REV Z Angle -180 °…
-
Page 162: Neutral Admittance Protection
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE PROTECTION Neutral admittance protection works by calculating the neutral admittance from the neutral input current and voltage (I ). The neutral current input is measured with an earth fault or sensitive earth fault current transformer and the neutral voltage is based on the internally derived quantity VN.
-
Page 163: Susceptance Operation
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Operate Operate Operate Operate G>Gs G< Gs G< Gs G>Gs Conductance: Conductance: Conductance: Non-Directional Directional Forward Directional Reverse E00710 Figure 68: Conductance operation Note: For forward operation, the centre of characteristic occurs when IN is in phase with VN. Note: If the correction angle is set to +30°, this rotates the boundary from 90°…
-
Page 164
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D Note: If the correction angle is set to +30°, this rotates the boundary from 0° — 180° to 330° — 150°. It is assumed that the direction of the G axis indicates 0°. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 165: High Impedance Fault Detection
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions HIGH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION A High Impedance Fault, also known as a Downed Conductor, happens when a primary conductor makes unwanted electrical contact with a road surface, pathway, tree etc., whereby due to the high impedance of the fault path, the fault current is restricted to a level below that which can be reliably detected by standard overcurrent devices.
-
Page 166: Component Harmonic Analysis
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 18.1.2 COMPONENT HARMONIC ANALYSIS The Component Harmonic Analysis (CHA) function monitors the measured SEF current, compares this with the average current value and uses the increment of the sampled value to extract the 3rd harmonic component. By evaluating the phase and amplitude differences between the fundamental and the third harmonic, it is possible to establish criteria, which can help determine the presence of a High Impedance Fault.
-
Page 167: Summary
P14D Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions Transient directionality is obtained by using the instantaneous power direction of the fault component. The instantaneous power is calculated directly from the samples of the fault component. In Transient situations, this is a more accurate method than using phasor based power calculations . The fault component circuit is used for analysis.
-
Page 168: High Impedance Fault Protection Logic
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 18.2 HIGH IMPEDANCE FAULT PROTECTION LOGIC VN (derived) Directionaliser ISEF Average Amplitude FA Decision Transient Fault FA Transient Increment FA Analysis Amplitude Steady Fault FA Steady Fault FA HIF Average Sample Array HIF Alarm CHA Decision Increment CHA Analysis…
-
Page 169: Chapter 7 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
CHAPTER 7 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION…
-
Page 170
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 171: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection CHAPTER OVERVIEW The device provides extensive Restricted Earth Fault functionality. This chapter describes the operation of this function including the principles of operation, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview REF Protection Principles Restricted Earth Fault Protection Implementation…
-
Page 172: Ref Protection Principles
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D REF PROTECTION PRINCIPLES Winding-to-core faults in a transformer can be caused by insulation breakdown. Such faults can have very low fault currents, but they still need to be picked up. If such faults are not identified, this could result in extreme damage to very expensive equipment.
-
Page 173: Resistance-Earthed Star Windings
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection RESISTANCE-EARTHED STAR WINDINGS Most distribution systems use resistance-earthed systems to limit the fault current. Consider the diagram below, which depicts an earth fault on the star winding of a resistance-earthed Dyn transformer (Dyn = Delta-Star with star-point neutral connection).
-
Page 174: Through Fault Stability
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D For solidly earthed systems, the operating current for the transformer differential protection is still significant for faults over most of the winding. For this reason, independent REF protection may not have been previously considered, especially where an additional device would have been needed.
-
Page 175: High Impedance Ref Principle
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection Phase A Phase A Phase B Phase B Phase C Phase C Phase A Phase A Phase B Phase B Phase C Phase C Neutral Connecting IED to star winding for Low Connecting IED to delta winding for Low Impedance REF Impedance REF…
-
Page 176: Figure 77: High Impedance Ref Principle
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D Healthy CT Saturated CT Protected circuit I = I V00671 Figure 77: High Impedance REF principle When subjected to heavy through faults the line current transformer may enter saturation unevenly, resulting in imbalance.
-
Page 177: Restricted Earth Fault Protection Implementation
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION Restricted Earth Fault Protection is implemented in the Restricted E/F column of the relevant settings group. It is here that the constants and bias currents are set. The REF protection may be configured to operate as either a high impedance or biased element.
-
Page 178: Delayed Bias
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D The following settings are provided to define this bias characteristic: IREF> Is1: sets the minimum trip threshold ● ● IREF> Is2: sets the bias current kneepoint whereby the required trip current starts increasing IREF>…
-
Page 179
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection > < − IREF CT ratio The protection primary operating current for a particular operating current with a particular level of magnetizing current: CT ratio IREF >… -
Page 180: Application Notes
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D APPLICATION NOTES STAR WINDING RESISTANCE EARTHED Consider the following resistance earthed star winding below. Primary Secondary V00681 Figure 80: Star winding, resistance earthed An earth fault on such a winding causes a current which is dependent on the value of earthing impedance. This earth fault current is proportional to the distance of the fault from the neutral point since the fault voltage is directly proportional to this distance.
-
Page 181: Low Impedance Ref Protection Application
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection LOW IMPEDANCE REF PROTECTION APPLICATION 4.2.1 SETTING GUIDELINES FOR BIASED OPERATION Two bias settings are provided in the REF characteristic. The K1 level of bias is applied up to through currents of Is2, which is normally set to the rated current of the transformer.
-
Page 182: High Impedance Ref Protection Application
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D Is1 is set to 10% of the winding nominal current: Ö 3 x 132 x 10 = (0.1 x 90 x 10 ) / ( = 39 Amps primary = 39/400 = 0.0975 Amps secondary (approx 0.1 A) Is2 is set to the rated current of the transformer: Ö…
-
Page 183: Setting Guidelines For High Impedance Operation
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection TN 1 CT TN 2 CT TN 3 CT Varistor V00685 Figure 84: Hi-Z REF protection for a delta winding TN1 CT Varistor V00686 Figure 85: Hi-Z REF Protection for autotransformer configuration 4.3.2 SETTING GUIDELINES FOR HIGH IMPEDANCE OPERATION This scheme is very sensitive and can protect against low levels of fault current in resistance grounded systems.
-
Page 184: Figure 86: High Impedance Ref For The Lv Winding
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D 400:1 Transformer: High Z 90 MVA 33/132 kV Dyn11, X = 5% Buderns: = 0.5 W = 0.98 W V00687 Figure 86: High Impedance REF for the LV winding 4.3.2.1 STABILITY VOLTAGE CALCULATION The transformer full load current, IFLC, is: Ö…
-
Page 185
P14D Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection / (IREF> Is1 (HV)) = 45.5 / 0.1 = 455 ohms To achieve an average operating time of 40 ms, Vk/Vs should be 3.5. The Kneepoint voltage is: = 4V = 4 x 45.5 = 182 V. If the actual V is greater than 4 times V , then the K factor increases. -
Page 186
Chapter 7 — Restricted Earth Fault Protection P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 187: Chapter 8 Cb Fail Protection
CHAPTER 8 CB FAIL PROTECTION…
-
Page 188
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 189: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection CHAPTER OVERVIEW The device provides a Circuit Breaker Fail Protection function. This chapter describes the operation of this function including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Circuit Breaker Fail Protection Circuit Breaker Fail Implementation Circuit Breaker Fail Logic…
-
Page 190: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL PROTECTION When a fault occurs, one or more protection devices will operate and issue a trip command to the relevant circuit breakers. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault and prevent, or at least limit, damage to the power system.
-
Page 191: Circuit Breaker Fail Implementation
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL IMPLEMENTATION Circuit Breaker Failure Protection is implemented in the CB FAIL column of the relevant settings group. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL TIMERS The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer, allowing configuration for the following scenarios: Simple CBF, where only CB Fail 1 Timer is enabled.
-
Page 192
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D after the circuit breaker in the primary system has opened ensuring that the only current flowing in the AC secondary circuit is the subsidence current. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 193: Circuit Breaker Fail Logic
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL LOGIC Ext. Trip 3ph Trip Command In CBF3PhStart IA< Start & IB< Start IC< Start IN< Start ZCD IA< & ZCD IB< ZCD IC< ZCD IN< CB Fail Alarm External Trip EF IN<…
-
Page 194: Figure 88: Circuit Breaker Fail Logic — Single Phase Start
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D External Trip A CBFExtPhAStart IA< Start ZCD IA< & CB Fail Alarm CBFExtPhBStart External Trip A Ext Prot Reset CBFExtPhCStart & Prot Reset & I< I< Only CB Open & I< & Pole Dead A External Trip B IB<…
-
Page 195: Undercurrent And Zcd Logic For Cb Fail
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection UNDERCURRENT AND ZCD LOGIC FOR CB FAIL IA< Start I< Current Set IB< Start I< Current Set IC< Start I< Current Set IN< Start IN< Current Set ISEF ISEF< Start ISEF< Current ZCD IA< ZCD IB<…
-
Page 196: Cb Fail Sef Protection Logic
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D CB FAIL SEF PROTECTION LOGIC ISEF>1 Trip ISEF>2 Trip CBF SEF Trip-1 ISEF>3 Trip ISEF>4 Trip & CBF SEF Trip-1 CBF SEF Trip Trip Command In V02002 Figure 91: CB Fail SEF Protection Logic P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 197: Cb Fail Non Current Protection Logic
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection CB FAIL NON CURRENT PROTECTION LOGIC V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V<3 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip V>3 Trip VN>1 Trip VN>2 Trip VN>3 Trip V2> Trip Power>1 3Ph Trip Power>1 A Trip Power>1 B Trip Power>1 C Trip Power>2 3Ph Trip Power>2 A Trip…
-
Page 198: Circuit Breaker Mapping
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D CIRCUIT BREAKER MAPPING CB Closed 3 ph CB in Service V02026 Figure 93: Circuit Breaker mapping P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 199: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection APPLICATION NOTES RESET MECHANISMS FOR CB FAIL TIMERS It is common practise to use low set undercurrent elements to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current. This covers the following situations: ●…
-
Page 200: Setting Guidelines (Undercurrent)
Chapter 8 — CB Fail Protection P14D CBF resets: 1. Undercurrent element asserts 2. Undercurrent element asserts and the breaker status indicates an open position 3. Protection resets and the undercurrent element asserts Fault occurs Safety Protection Maximum breaker reset margin operating time clearing time…
-
Page 201: Chapter 9 Current Transformer Requirements
CHAPTER 9 CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS…
-
Page 202
Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 203: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview CT requirements P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 204: Ct Requirements
Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements P14D CT REQUIREMENTS The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum fault current of 50 times the rated current (In) with the device having an instantaneous overcurrent setting of 25 times the rated current. The current transformer requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection elements.
-
Page 205: Earth Fault Protection
P14D Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements Instantaneous phase overcurrent elements EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 2.2.1 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements 2.2.2 NON-DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements SEF PROTECTION (RESIDUALLY CONNECTED) 2.3.1 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS Time delayed SEF protection ≥…
-
Page 206: Sef Protection (Core-Balanced Ct)
Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements P14D SEF PROTECTION (CORE-BALANCED CT) 2.4.1 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS Instantaneous element ≥ Note: Ensure that the phase error of the applied core balance current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current.
-
Page 207: High Impedance Busbar Protection
P14D Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements ≥ 4 Note: Class x CTs should be used for high impedance REF applications. HIGH IMPEDANCE BUSBAR PROTECTION The high impedance bus bar protection element will maintain stability for through faults and operate for internal faults.
-
Page 208
Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements P14D Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics follow the expression: 0.25 V = CI where: V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the Metrosil ● C = Constant of the Metrosil ●… -
Page 209: Use Of Ansi C-Class Cts
P14D Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements Metrosils for devices with a 5 Amp CT These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements: The Metrosil current should be less than 100 mA rms (the actual maximum currents passed by the devices ●…
-
Page 210
Chapter 9 — Current Transformer Requirements P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 211: Chapter 10 Voltage Protection Functions
CHAPTER 10 VOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS…
-
Page 212
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 213: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions CHAPTER OVERVIEW The device provides a wide range of voltage protection functions. This chapter describes the operation of these functions including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Undervoltage Protection Overvoltage Protection…
-
Page 214: Undervoltage Protection
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: Undervoltage conditions can be related to increased loads, whereby the supply voltage will decrease in ●…
-
Page 215: Undervoltage Protection Logic
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions Outputs are available for single or three-phase conditions via the V< Operate Mode cell for each stage. UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION LOGIC V< Measur’t Mode V<1 Start A/AB & V<1 Voltage Set & V <1 Trip A/AB V<1 Time Delay V<…
-
Page 216: Application Notes
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D APPLICATION NOTES 2.3.1 UNDERVOLTAGE SETTING GUIDELINES In most applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operate during system earth fault conditions. If this is the case you should select phase-to-phase voltage measurement, as this quantity is less affected by single- phase voltage dips due to earth faults.
-
Page 217: Overvoltage Protection
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Overvoltage conditions are generally related to loss of load conditions, whereby the supply voltage increases in magnitude. This situation would normally be rectified by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs (Auto Voltage Regulators) or On Load Tap Changers.
-
Page 218: Overvoltage Protection Logic
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION LOGIC V> Measur’t Mode V>1 Start A/AB & V >1 Trip A/AB V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V> Measur’t Mode V>1 Start B/BC & V>1 Trip B/BC V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>…
-
Page 219
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions This type of protection must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage devices at other locations on the system. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 220: Rate Of Change Of Voltage Protection
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D RATE OF CHANGE OF VOLTAGE PROTECTION Where there are very large loads, imbalances may occur, which could result in rapid decline in system voltage. The situation could be so bad that shedding one or two stages of load would be unlikely to stop this rapid voltage decline.
-
Page 221
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions The function also produces three-phase Start and Trip signals, which can be set to Any Phase (where any of the phases can trigger the start) or Three Phase (where all three phases are required to trigger the start). The averaging buffer is reset either when the stage is disabled or no frequency is found (Freq Not Found DDB signal). -
Page 222: Residual Overvoltage Protection
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION On a healthy three-phase power system, the sum of the three-phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector sum of three balanced vectors displaced from each other by 120°. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system, this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced.
-
Page 223: Residual Overvoltage Logic
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE LOGIC VN>1 Start & VN>1 Voltage Set & IDMT/DT VN>1 Trip VTS Fast Block VN>1 Timer Blk V00802 Figure 98: Residual Overvoltage logic The Residual Overvoltage module (VN>) is a level detector that detects when the voltage magnitude exceeds a set threshold, for each stage.
-
Page 224: Calculation For Impedance Earthed Systems
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D X 3 E + 2Z E00800 Figure 99: Residual voltage for a solidly earthed system As can be seen from the above diagram, the residual voltage measured on a solidly earthed system is solely dependent on the ratio of source impedance behind the protection to the line impedance in front of the protection, up to the point of fault.
-
Page 225: Neutral Voltage Displacement (Nvd) Protection Applied To Condenser Bushings (Capacitor Cones)
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions X 3 E + 2Z + 3Z E00801 Figure 100: Residual voltage for an impedance earthed system An impedance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance.
-
Page 226: Figure 101: Star Connected Condenser Bushings
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D Warning: When operating in areas with restricted space, suitable protective barriers must be used where there is a risk of electric shock due to exposed terminals. Neutral Voltage Displacement Relay (NVD) E00819 Figure 101: Star connected condenser bushings Calculations for Condenser Bushing Systems Consider a single-phase fault to ground on B-Phase: -jXc…
-
Page 227: Figure 103: Condenser Bushing System Vectors
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions Ia = √3I V = √3V I = 3I E00821 Figure 103: Condenser bushing system vectors In the figure above: (a) Shows three healthy voltages, three capacitor currents that lead their respective voltages by 90º and sum to zero, (b) Shows B phase earthed, A and C voltages are √3 times their healthy magnitude &…
-
Page 228: Figure 104: Device Connection With Resistors And Shorting Contact
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D Where If is the total fault current which would flow in an NVD relay (neglecting the impedance of the relay itself), then knowing this current (If) and the input impedance of the relay (Rr) we can calculate the voltage produced across it (Vr) during a fault condition: Vr = If x Rr Therefore, we would recommend setting the relay to less than half this voltage:…
-
Page 229: Setting Guidelines
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions VA (kV) 19.00 19.00 19.00 If (mA) 1.08 1.62 2.69 Rr (kΩ)* 22.00 22.00 22.00 Vr (V) 23.63 35.44 59.06 Vs (V) 11.81 17.72 29.53 *Relay and Resistor Combination Wiring Diagram P14D/P94V E00823 Figure 105: Device connection P14D/P94V 5.3.4 SETTING GUIDELINES…
-
Page 230: Negative Sequence Overvoltage Protection
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Where an incoming feeder is supplying rotating plant equipment such as an induction motor, correct phasing and balance of the supply is essential. Incorrect phase rotation will result in connected motors rotating in the wrong direction.
-
Page 231
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions The operation time of the element depends on the application, but a typical setting would be in the region of 5 seconds. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 232: Positive Sequence Undervoltage Protection
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D POSITIVE SEQUENCE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION POSITIVE SEQUENCE UNDERVOLTAGE IMPLEMENTATION Positive Sequence Undervoltage Protection is implemented under the POS SEQ U/V heading in the VOLT PROTECTION Voltage column of the relevant settings group. The product provides two stages of Positive Sequence Undervoltage protection with independent time delay characteristics.
-
Page 233: Positive Sequence Overvoltage Protection
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions POSITIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION POSITIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE IMPLEMENTATION Positive Sequence Overvoltage Protection is implemented under the POS SEQ O/V heading in the VOLT PROTECTION Voltage column of the relevant settings group. The product provides two stages of Positive Sequence Overvoltage protection with independent time delay characteristics.
-
Page 234: Moving Average Voltage Functions
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D MOVING AVERAGE VOLTAGE FUNCTIONS Moving average voltage functions are available for: Undervoltage (Vavg<) ● Overvoltage (Vavg>) ● ● Zero Sequence Voltage (V0avg>) Positive Sequence Voltage (V1Avg>) ● Negative Sequence Voltage (V2Avg>) ● The voltage is sampled at 5 Hz (one sample every 200 ms for a 50 Hz system). The refresh period is 3 seconds, meaning 15 samples are collected every refresh period.
-
Page 235: Moving Average Overvoltage Logic
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions MOVING AVERAGE OVERVOLTAGE LOGIC Vavg>1 Status Vavg>1 Start A VA Mov Average & Vavg >1 Trip A Vavg>1 Volt Set Vavg>1 TripTime Vavg>1 StrtTime Vavg>1 Status Vavg>1 Start B VB Mov Average & Vavg >1 Trip B Vavg>1 Volt Set Vavg>1 TripTime…
-
Page 236: Moving Average Negative Sequence Voltage Logic
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D MOVING AVERAGE NEGATIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE LOGIC V2avg >1 Status V 2avg>1 Start V 2 Mov Average & V2avg >1 Trip V 2avg>1 Volt Set V2avg>1 TripTime V2 avg>1 StrtTime V Blocking 1 Enabled &…
-
Page 237: Voltage Vector Shift Protection
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions VOLTAGE VECTOR SHIFT PROTECTION The P14D has a single stage Voltage Vector Shift protection element. This element measures the change in voltage angle over successive power system half-cycles. The element operates by measuring the time between zero crossings on the voltage waveforms.
-
Page 238: Figure 116: Vector Diagram Representing Steady State Condition
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D V = V sin {2p (f + t R /2)t} Hence the angle change: Dq(t) after time t is given by: Dq(t) = p R Therefore, the phase of the voltage with respect to a fixed frequency reference when subject to a constant rate of change of frequency changes in proportion to t .
-
Page 239: Figure 118: Transient Voltage Vector Change Q Due To Change In Load Current Idl
P14D Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions θ ∆I X ∆I E00873 Figure 118: Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current ID The voltage vector shift function is designed to respond within one to two full mains cycles when its threshold is exceeded.
-
Page 240
Chapter 10 — Voltage Protection Functions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 241: Chapter 11 Frequency Protection Functions
CHAPTER 11 FREQUENCY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS…
-
Page 242
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 243: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions CHAPTER OVERVIEW The device provides a range of frequency protection functions. This chapter describes the operation of these functions including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Frequency Protection Overview Underfrequency Protection Overfrequency Protection…
-
Page 244: Frequency Protection Overview
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D FREQUENCY PROTECTION OVERVIEW Power generation and utilisation needs to be well balanced in any industrial, distribution or transmission network. These electrical networks are dynamic entities, with continually varying loads and supplies, which are continually affecting the system frequency.
-
Page 245: Underfrequency Protection
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions UNDERFREQUENCY PROTECTION A reduced system frequency implies that the net load is in excess of the available generation. Such a condition can arise, when an interconnected system splits, and the load left connected to one of the subsystems is in excess of the capacity of the generators in that particular subsystem.
-
Page 246
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D An example of a four-stage load shedding scheme for 50 Hz systems is shown below: Stage Element Frequency Setting (Hz) Time Setting (Sec) Stage 1(f+t) 49.0 20 s Stage 2(f+t) 48.6 20 s Stage 3(f+t) 48.2 10 s… -
Page 247: Overfrequency Protection
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION An increased system frequency arises when the mechanical power input to a generator exceeds the electrical power output. This could happen, for instance, when there is a sudden loss of load due to tripping of an outgoing feeder from the plant to a load centre.
-
Page 248: Figure 121: Power System Segregation Based Upon Frequency Measurements
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D Stage Element Frequency Setting (Hz) Time Setting (Sec.) Stage 6(f+t) 51.0 The relatively long time delays are intended to provide time for the system controls to respond and will work well in a situation where the increase of system frequency is slow. For situations where rapid increase of frequency is expected, the protection scheme above could be supplemented by rate of change of frequency protection elements.
-
Page 249: Independent R.o.c.o.f Protection
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions INDEPENDENT R.O.C.O.F PROTECTION Where there are very large loads, imbalances may occur that result in rapid decline in system frequency. The situation could be so bad that shedding one or two stages of load is unlikely to stop this rapid frequency decline. In such a situation, standard underfrequency protection will normally have to be supplemented with protection that responds to the rate of change of frequency.
-
Page 250: Application Notes
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D APPLICATION NOTES 5.3.1 SETTING GUIDELINES Considerable care should be taken when setting this element because it is not supervised by a frequency setting. Setting of the time delay or increasing the number of df/dt averaging cycles will improve stability but this is traded against reduced tripping times.
-
Page 251: Frequency-Supervised R.o.c.o.f Protection
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions FREQUENCY-SUPERVISED R.O.C.O.F PROTECTION Frequency-supervised Rate of Change of Frequency protection works in a similar way to Independent Rate of change of Frequency Protection. The only difference is that with frequency supervision, the actual frequency itself is monitored and the protection operates when both the rate of change of frequency AND the frequency itself go outside the set limits.
-
Page 252: Frequency-Supervised R.o.c.o.f Logic
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D FREQUENCY-SUPERVISED R.O.C.O.F LOGIC Frequency df/dt determination & Stg1 df /dt+t Trp df /dt Avg .Cycles & f+df /dt 1 df/dt Frequency Frequency determination averaging Freq Avg.Cycles f +df/ dt 1 freq Stage 1 Enabled f+df/dt 1 Status Positive…
-
Page 253: Setting Guidelines
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions Frequency Slow decay Rapid decay Time E00858 Figure 124: Frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection 6.3.2 SETTING GUIDELINES We recommend that the frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection (f+df/dt) element be used in conjunction with the time delayed frequency protection (f+t) elements.
-
Page 254: Average Rate Of Change Of Frequency Protection
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D AVERAGE RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY PROTECTION Owing to the complex dynamics of power systems, variations in frequency during times of generation-to-load imbalance are highly non-linear. Oscillations will occur as the system seeks to address the imbalance, resulting in frequency oscillations typically in the order of 0.1 Hz to 1 Hz, in addition to the basic change in frequency.
-
Page 255: Average R.o.c.o.f Logic
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions The average rate of change of frequency is then measured based on the frequency difference, ∆f over the settable time period, ∆t. The following settings are relevant for Df/Dt protection: f+Df/Dt (n) Status: determines whether the stage is for falling or rising frequency conditions ●…
-
Page 256
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D Frequency Average Rate of Change of Frequency «f+Df/Dt [81RAV]» Elements «f+t [81U/81O]» Elements (f+Df/Dt) f (f+t) f Frequency (f+t) t (f+Df/Dt) Df Frequency (f+Df/Dt) Dt Time Stage Frequency Setting Setting (Hz) Time Setting (Sec.) Diff Setting, (Hz) Period, (Sec.) (Hz) -
Page 257: Load Shedding And Restoration
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions LOAD SHEDDING AND RESTORATION The goal of load shedding is to stabilise a falling system frequency. As the system stabilises and the generation capability improves, the system frequency will recover to near normal levels and after some time delay it is possible to consider the restoration of load onto the healthy system.
-
Page 258: Figure 127: Load Restoration With Short Deviation Into Holding Band
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D System Frequency Restoration Frequency Holding Band Shedding Frequency Trip Underfrequency Element Complete Holding Timer Time less than Complete Holding Timer Setting Restoration Timer Stage 1 Restore Start Stage 1 Restore Enable Restoration Time System Frequency Partial Underfrequency Trip System Frequency…
-
Page 259: Load Restoration Logic
P14D Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions System Frequency Restoration Frequency Holding Band Shedding Frequency Trip Underfrequency Element Holding Complete Timer Restoration Time greater than Complete Holding Timer Setting Timer Stage 1 Restore Start Holding Timer Stage 1 Restore Enable Underfrequency System Frequency Underfrequency…
-
Page 260: Application Notes
Chapter 11 — Frequency Protection Functions P14D APPLICATION NOTES 8.4.1 SETTING GUIDELINES A four stage, single frequency load restoration scheme is shown below. The frequency setting has been chosen such that there is sufficient separation between the highest load shed frequency and the restoration frequency to prevent any possible hunting.
-
Page 261: Chapter 12 Power Protection Functions
CHAPTER 12 POWER PROTECTION FUNCTIONS…
-
Page 262
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 263: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions CHAPTER OVERVIEW Power protection is used for protecting generators. Although the main function of this device is for feeder applications, it can also be used as a cost effective alternative for protecting small distributed generators, typically less than 2 MW.
-
Page 264: Overpower Protection
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D OVERPOWER PROTECTION With Overpower, we should consider two distinct conditions: Forward Overpower and Reverse Overpower. A forward overpower condition occurs when the system load becomes excessive. A generator is rated to supply a certain amount of power and if it attempts to supply power to the system greater than its rated capacity, it could be damaged.
-
Page 265: Application Notes
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions APPLICATION NOTES 2.3.1 FORWARD OVERPOWER SETTING GUIDELINES The relevant power threshold settings should be set greater than the full load rated power. The operating mode should be set to Forward. A time delay setting (Power>(n) TimeDelay) should be applied. This setting is dependant on the application, but would typically be around 5 seconds.
-
Page 266
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D The operating mode should be set to Reverse. The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation. A time delay setting, of approximately 5 s would be typically applied. The delay on the reset timer, Power>1 tRESET or Power>2 tRESET, would normally be set to zero. -
Page 267: Underpower Protection
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions UNDERPOWER PROTECTION Although the Underpower protection is directional and can be configured as forward or reverse, the most common application is for Low Forward Power protection. When a machine is generating and the circuit breaker connecting the generator to the system is tripped, the electrical load on the generator is cut off.
-
Page 268: Underpower Logic
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D UNDERPOWER LOGIC A Phase Watts Power<1 A Start A Phase VA Power<1 1 Ph Watt & & Power<1 A Trip Power<1 1 Ph VAR Power>1TimeDelay Power<1 Mode & Active Reactive Power<1 3 PhStart 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VA Power<1 3 Ph Watt…
-
Page 269
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions For interlocking non-urgent trip applications the time delay associated with the low forward power protection function could be set to zero. However, some delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle closure. -
Page 270: Sensitive Power Protection
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D SENSITIVE POWER PROTECTION In some applications, it is necessary to have very high accuracy when applying power protection. For such applications it is possible to use metering class CTs and separate Sensitive Power elements. The Sensitive Power protection is a single-phase power element using phase A current and voltage.
-
Page 271: Sensitive Power Logic
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions SENSITIVE POWER LOGIC SensP 1 Start A Aph Sen Watts & Sens P >1 Setting SensP 1 Trip A Aph Sen Watts Sens P 1 Delay & Sens -P>1Setting Aph Sen Watts & Sens P <1 Setting Aph Sens Power Enabled…
-
Page 272: Figure 133: Sensitive Power Input Vectors
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D = A-phase-N volts = A-phase sensitive current = compensated a phase sensitive current Φ = angle of I with respect to V = CT correction angle Φ V00903 Figure 133: Sensitive Power input vectors CT Compensation The CT correction rotates the I vector by the correction angle.
-
Page 273: Sensitive Power Setting Guidelines
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions 4.4.2 SENSITIVE POWER SETTING GUIDELINES For reverse and low forward power protection, if settings greater than 3% Pn are used, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current transformers will not result in any risk of maloperation. If settings of less than 3% are used, however, we recommend that the current input is driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer.
-
Page 274: Wattmetric Directional Earth Fault Protection
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D WATTMETRIC DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION Note: Wattmetric Earth Fault Protection (WDE) is only available in P14D Model H. Some distribution systems run completely insulated from earth. Such systems are called unearthed systems. The advantage of an unearthed system is that a single phase to earth fault does not cause an earth fault current to flow.
-
Page 275: Wde Implementation
P14D Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions For a forward directional fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of Petersen’s coil, which is negative. For a reverse fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of the transmission line, which is positive.
-
Page 276: Figure 134: Wattmetric Earth Fault Protection Logic Diagram
Chapter 12 — Power Protection Functions P14D DPA_POS WDE>1 Act Pow DPA_NEG Invert Qtran_POS WDE>1 Act Pow Qtran _NEG Invert Forward DPA_NEG_ RegPerm Direction WDE>1 Fwd Start Negative Determination Power DPA_NEG Detection Qtran _NEG WDE>1 Hold Time Trip WDE>1 Fwd Time WDE>1 Trip Delay WDE Inhib Delay…
-
Page 277: Chapter 13 Autoreclose
CHAPTER 13 AUTORECLOSE…
-
Page 278
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 279: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose CHAPTER OVERVIEW Selected models of this product provide sophisticated Autoreclose (AR) functionality. The purpose of this chapter is to describe the operation of this functionality including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Introduction to 3-phase Autoreclose Implementation…
-
Page 280: Introduction To 3-Phase Autoreclose
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D INTRODUCTION TO 3-PHASE AUTORECLOSE It is known that approximately 80 — 90% of faults are transient in nature. This means that most faults do not last long and are self-clearing. A common example of a transient fault is an insulator flashover, which may be caused for example by lightning, clashing conductors or wind-blown debris.
-
Page 281: Implementation
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose IMPLEMENTATION Autoreclose functionality is a software option, which is selected when ordering the device, so this description only applies to models with this option. Autoreclose works for phase overcurrent (POC) earth fault (EF) and sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection. It is implemented in the AUTORECLOSE column of the relevant settings group.
-
Page 282: Autoreclose Function Inputs
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION INPUTS The Autoreclose function has several logic inputs, which can be mapped to any of the opto-inputs or to one or more of the DDB output signals generated by the PSL. The functions of these inputs are described below. CB HEALTHY It is necessary to establish if there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker (spring charged, gas pressure healthy, etc.) before the CB can be closed.
-
Page 283: Ext Ar Prot Trip (External Ar Protection Trip)
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose disabled. This mapping is not essential, because the No System Checks setting in the AUTORECLOSE column can be enabled to achieve the same effect. This DDB can also be mapped to an opto-input, to allow the IED to receive a signal from an external system monitoring device, indicating that the system conditions are suitable for CB closing.
-
Page 284: Ar Init Triptest (Initiate Trip Test)
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D could also be mapped to an opto-input to provide a ‘hold off’ function for the follower CB in a ‘master/follower’ application with 2 CBs. If this optional interlock is not required, DeadTime Enabled can be left unmapped, and it will default to a high state.
-
Page 285: Autoreclose Function Outputs
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION OUTPUTS The Autoreclose function has several logic outputs, which can be assigned to output relay contacts, monitor bits in the COMMISSIONING TESTS column, or the PSL. The functions of these outputs are described below. AR IN PROGRESS This signal is present during the complete re-close cycle from the start of protection to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
-
Page 286: Deadtime In Prog
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D DEADTIME IN PROG The DeadTime in Prog output indicates that the dead time is in progress. This signal is set when Reclose Checks is set AND input Dead TimeEnabled is high. This may be useful during commissioning to check the operation of the Autoreclose cycle.
-
Page 287: Autoreclose Function Alarms
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION ALARMS The following DDB signals will produce an alarm. These are described below. AR NO SYS CHECK The AR No Sys Check alarm indicates that the system voltages are not suitable for autoreclosing at the end of the system check time (setting Sys Check Time), leading to a lockout condition.
-
Page 288: Autoreclose Operation
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D AUTORECLOSE OPERATION The Autoreclose function is a complex function consisting of several modules interacting with one another. This is described in terms of separate logic diagrams, which link together by means of Internal signals (depicted by the pink-coloured boxes.
-
Page 289: Four-Position Selector Switch Implementation
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose AR Mode Select Setting Description Auto or Non-auto mode selection is determined by the command cell Autoreclose Mode in the CB CONTROL Command Mode column. Auto or Non-auto mode selection is determined by an opto-input mapped to AR Auto Mode Opto Set Mode If the AR Auto Mode input is high, Auto operating mode is selected.
-
Page 290: Operating Mode Selection Logic
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D 7.1.2 OPERATING MODE SELECTION LOGIC Auto -Reclose Disable Autoreclose disabled Enable & Live Line Mode (int) AR LiveLine Mode AR Mode Select Opto Set Mode & & User Set Mode Non Auto Mode & & Pulse Set Mode &…
-
Page 291: Start Signal Logic
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose A separate protection device may also initiate Autoreclose. The Autoreclose can be initiated from a protection Trip, or when sequence coordination is required from a protection Start. If external triggering of Autoreclose is required, the following DDB signals should be mapped to opto-inputs: ●…
-
Page 292: Trip Signal Logic
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D 7.2.2 TRIP SIGNAL LOGIC AR Init TripTest Test Autoreclose AR Trip Test 3 pole Test Ext AR Prot Trip & Ext Prot Initiate Main AR Trip Command In I>1 Trip & I>1 AR Initiate Main AR IN1 >1 Trip &…
-
Page 293: Shots Exceeded Logic
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose 7.2.4 SHOTS EXCEEDED LOGIC Main Protection Start & SC Count >= Main Shots Main High Shots SEF Protection Start & SC Count >= SEF Shots SEF High Shots V00504 Figure 140: Shots Exceeded logic 7.2.5 AR INITIATION LOGIC Auto Mode (int) &…
-
Page 294: Blocking Instantaneous Protection For Lockouts
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D AR SeqCounter 0 Trip 1 Main & Block Inst Prot No Block AR SeqCounter 1 Trip 2 Main & Block Inst Prot No Block AR SeqCounter 2 Trip 3 Main & Block Main Prot Trips Block Inst Prot No Block AR SeqCounter 3…
-
Page 295: Dead Time Control
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose Instantaneous protection can also be blocked when the IED is locked out, using the AR Lockout setting. It can also be blocked after a manual close using the Manual Close setting. When the IED is in the Non-auto mode it can be blocked by using the AR Deselected setting.
-
Page 296: Ar Cb Close Control
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D Scheme 2 (Voltage models only ) AR with ChkSyn Enable & Disable & AR Sync Check DeadTime Enabled & AR SeqCounter 1 & AR SeqCounter 2 DT Complete & DeadTime in Prog & AR SeqCounter 3 &…
-
Page 297: Ar System Checks
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose Reset Total AR Total Shot Counter (Increment on +ve edge ) CB Cls Fail & Auto Close CB Open 3 ph & Hold Reclaim Output & & DT Complete & Autoreclose Start Lockout Alarm & CB Closed 3 ph &…
-
Page 298: Reclaim Timer Initiation
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D AR Sys Checks AR SysChecks OK SysChk on Shot 1 Enabled & AR SeqCounter 1 No system Checks Enabled AR SysChecks OK Live/ Dead Ccts Enabled & LiveDead Ccts OK AR with ChkSyn Enabled & AR Sync Check Check Sync 1 OK AR with SysSyn…
-
Page 299: Autoreclose Inhibit
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose Lockout Reset HMI Clear Reset Lockout Reset Lockout alarm & Lockout CB Closed 3 ph Reset Lockout by CB Close User Interface Reset Lckout Alm CB Open 3 ph & Auto close & Successful close CB Closed 3 ph &…
-
Page 300: Autoreclose Lockout
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D inhibit period following manual CB closure. If Man Close on Flt is set to No Lockout, the CB trips without reclosure, but Autoreclose is not locked out. You may need to block selected fast non-discriminating protection in order to obtain fully discriminative tripping during the AR initiation inhibit period following CB manual close.
-
Page 301: Sequence Co-Ordination
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose manual closing during the AR Inhibit Time when the Man Close on Flt setting is set to Lockout. This is shown as follows: Ext. Trip 3ph Main Protection Trip & SEF Protection Trip Protection Lockt Autoreclose inhibit Man Close on Flt Lockout…
-
Page 302: System Checks For First Reclose
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D instantaneous protection at the same time. When sequence co-ordination is disabled, the circuit breaker has to be tripped to start the dead time, and the sequence count is advanced by one. When using sequence co-ordination for some applications such as downstream pole-mounted reclosers, it may be desirable to re-enable instantaneous protection when the recloser has locked out.
-
Page 303: Setting Guidelines
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose SETTING GUIDELINES NUMBER OF SHOTS There are no clear cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular application. Generally medium voltage systems use only two or three shot Autoreclose schemes. However, in certain countries, for specific applications, a four-shot scheme is used.
-
Page 304: Load Requirements
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D two circuits to be staggered, e.g. one at 5 seconds and the other at 10 seconds, so that the two circuit breakers do not reclose simultaneously following a fault affecting both circuits. For multi-shot Autoreclose cycles, the second shot and subsequent shot dead times are usually longer than the first shot, to allow time for semi-permanent faults to burn clear, and for the CB to recharge.
-
Page 305: Reclaim Timer Setting
P14D Chapter 13 — Autoreclose 1st dead time = 5 — 10 seconds 2nd dead time = 30 seconds 3rd dead time = 60 — 180 seconds 4th dead time = 1 — 30 minutes RECLAIM TIMER SETTING A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer: Supply continuity: Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults.
-
Page 306
Chapter 13 — Autoreclose P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 307: Chapter 14 Monitoring And Control
CHAPTER 14 MONITORING AND CONTROL…
-
Page 308
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 309: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control CHAPTER OVERVIEW As well as providing a range of protection functions, the product includes comprehensive monitoring and control functionality. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Event Records Disturbance Recorder Measurements CB Condition Monitoring CB State Monitoring Circuit Breaker Control Pole Dead Function…
-
Page 310: Event Records
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D EVENT RECORDS General Electric devices record events in an event log. This allows you to establish the sequence of events that led up to a particular situation. For example, a change in a digital input signal or protection element output signal would cause an event record to be created and stored in the event log.
-
Page 311: Opto-Input Events
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control Standard events are further sub-categorised internally to include different pieces of information. These are: Protection events (starts and trips) ● ● Maintenance record events Platform events ● Note: The first event in the list (event 0) is the most recent event to have occurred. 2.1.1 OPTO-INPUT EVENTS If one or more of the opto-inputs has changed state since the last time the protection algorithm ran (which runs at…
-
Page 312: Fault Record Events
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D 2.1.4 FAULT RECORD EVENTS An event record is created for every fault the IED detects. This is also known as a fault record. The event type description shown in the Event Text cell for this type of event is always Fault Recorded. The IED contains a separate register containing the latest fault records.
-
Page 313: Platform Events
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control The event type description shown in the Event Text cell for this type of event is dependent on the protection event that occurred. Each time a protection event occurs, a DDB signal changes state. It is the name of this DDB signal followed by ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ that appears in the Event Text cell.
-
Page 314: Disturbance Recorder
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D DISTURBANCE RECORDER The disturbance recorder feature allows you to record selected current and voltage inputs to the protection elements, together with selected digital signals. The digital signals may be inputs, outputs, or internal DDB signals. The disturbance records can be extracted using the disturbance record viewer in the settings application software.
-
Page 315: Measurements
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control MEASUREMENTS MEASURED QUANTITIES The device measures directly and calculates a number of system quantities, which are updated every second. You can view these values in the relevant MEASUREMENT columns or with the Measurement Viewer in the settings application software.
-
Page 316: Demand Values
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D Measurement Mode Parameter Signing Export Power – Import Power Lagging Vars – Leading VArs The device also calculates the per-phase and three-phase power factors. These power values increment the total real and total reactive energy measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported and imported energy.
-
Page 317: Fault Locator
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control FAULT LOCATOR Some models provide fault location functionality. It is possible to identify the fault location by measuring the fault voltage and current magnitude and phases and presenting this information to a Fault Locator function. The fault locator is triggered whenever a fault record is generated, and the subsequent fault location data is included as part of the fault record.
-
Page 318: Cb Condition Monitoring
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D CB CONDITION MONITORING The device records various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing an accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters are incremented every time the device issues a trip command.
-
Page 319: Setting The Thresholds For The Operating Time
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control 5.1.3 SETTING THE THRESHOLDS FOR THE OPERATING TIME Slow CB operation indicates the need for mechanism maintenance. Alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint and CB Time Lockout) are provided to enforce this. They can be set in the range of 5 to 500 ms. This time relates to the interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
-
Page 320: Cb State Monitoring
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D CB STATE MONITORING CB State monitoring is used to verify the open or closed state of a circuit breaker. Most circuit breakers have auxiliary contacts through which they transmit their status (open or closed) to control equipment such as IEDs. These auxiliary contacts are known as: 52A for contacts that follow the state of the CB ●…
-
Page 321: Cb State Monitoring Logic
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control CB STATE MONITORING LOGIC CB Status Input None Both 52 A and 52 B & CB Aux 3ph(52-A) & CB Closed 3 ph & Plant Status CB1 Closed CB1 Open & & CB Open 3 ph &…
-
Page 322: Circuit Breaker Control
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL Although some circuit breakers do not provide auxiliary contacts, most provide auxiliary contacts to reflect the state of the circuit breaker. These are: CBs with 52A contacts (where the auxiliary contact follows the state of the CB) ●…
-
Page 323: Cb Control Using The Hotkeys
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control For this to work you have to set the CB control by cell to option 1 Local, option 3 Local + Remote, option 5 Opto+Local, or option 7 Opto+Local+Remote in the CB CONTROL column. CB CONTROL USING THE HOTKEYS The hotkeys allow you to manually trip and close the CB without the need to enter the SYSTEM DATA column.
-
Page 324: Cb Control Using The Opto-Inputs
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D default PSL is set up such that Function key 2 initiates a trip and Function key 3 initiates a close. For this to work you have to set the CB control by cell to option 5 Opto+Local, or option 7 Opto+Local+Remote in the CB CONTROL column.
-
Page 325: Synchronisation Check
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control Protection Trip Trip Remote Control Trip Close Remote Control Close Local Remote Close Trip E01207 Figure 155: Remote Control of Circuit Breaker SYNCHRONISATION CHECK Where the check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual circuit breaker Close commands.
-
Page 326: Cb Control Logic
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D CB CONTROL LOGIC CB Control Disabled Opto Local Opto+Local Enable opto -initiated CB trip and close Remote Opto +Remote Local+Remote Opto +Rem+Local HMI Trip Control Trip & & Init Trip CB & Man CB Trip Fail &…
-
Page 327: Pole Dead Function
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control POLE DEAD FUNCTION The Pole Dead Logic is used to determine and indicate that one or more phases of the line are not energised. A Pole Dead condition is determined either by measuring: the line currents and/or voltages, or ●…
-
Page 328: System Checks
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D SYSTEM CHECKS In some situations it is possible for both «bus» and «line» sides of a circuit breaker to be live when a circuit breaker is open — for example at the ends of a feeder that has a power source at each end. Therefore, it is normally necessary to check that the network conditions on both sides are suitable, before closing the circuit breaker.
-
Page 329: Check Synchronisation
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control signal is generated (Dead Bus, or Dead Line, depending on which side is being measured). If the measured voltage exceeds the Live Voltage setting, a DDB signal is generated (Live Bus, or Live Line, depending on which side is being measured).
-
Page 330: System Split
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D 0º Check Sync Stage 2 Limits Check Sync Stage 1 Limits Live Volts Rotating Vector Nomical Volts V LINE Dead Volts ±180º System Split E01204 Limits Figure 158: Check Synchronisation vector diagram 9.1.5 SYSTEM SPLIT If the line side and bus side are of the same frequency (i.e.
-
Page 331: System Check Logic
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control SYSTEM CHECK LOGIC System Checks Disabled SysChks Inactive Enabled CS1 Criteria OK & CS2 Criteria OK & SS Criteria OK Select & CS1 Slip Freq > & CS1 Slipfreq> CS1 Slip Freq < &…
-
Page 332: System Check Psl
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D SYSTEM CHECK PSL SysChks Inactive Check Sync 1 OK Check Sync 2 OK Man Check Synch Live Line & Dead Bus AR Sys Checks & Dead Line & Live Bus V02028 Figure 160: System Check PSL APPLICATION NOTES 9.4.1 SLIP CONTROL…
-
Page 333: Predictive Closure Of Circuit Breaker
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control application is on a closely interconnected system, where synchronism is normally retained when a feeder is tripped. But under some circumstances, with parallel interconnections out of service, the feeder ends can drift out of synchronism when the feeder is tripped.
-
Page 334: Switch Status And Control
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D SWITCH STATUS AND CONTROL All P40 Agile products support Switch Status and Control for up to 8 switchgear elements in an IEC61850 substation. The device is able to monitor the status of and control up to eight switches. The types of switch that can be controlled are: Load Break switch ●…
-
Page 335: Switch Status Logic
P14D Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control These settings allow you to control the width of the open and close pulses. SWI1 Sta Alrm T This setting allows you to define the duration of wait timer before the relay raises a status alarm. SWI1 Trp Alrm T and SWI1 Cls Alrm T These settings allow you to control the delay of the open and close alarms when the final switch status is not in line with expected status.
-
Page 336: Switch Control Logic
Chapter 14 — Monitoring and Control P14D 10.2 SWITCH CONTROL LOGIC SWI1 Control by & Local Local +Remote & Remote Local Remote Blk Rmt SWI 1 Ops SWI1 Cls Puls T & SWI1 Control Cls SWI1 Status Opn SWI1 Status Cls SWI1 Status Inpt &…
-
Page 337: Chapter 15 Supervision
CHAPTER 15 SUPERVISION…
-
Page 338
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 339: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter describes the supervison functions. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview DC Supply Monitor Voltage Transformer Supervision Current Transformer Supervision Trip Circuit Supervision P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 340: Dc Supply Monitor
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D DC SUPPLY MONITOR This product can be powered using either a DC or AC supply. As a DC supply is normally used, a DC Supply Monitoring feature is included to indicate the DC supply status. The nominal DC Station supply is 48 V DC, which is provided by a bank of batteries.
-
Page 341: Dc Supply Monitor Logic
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision DC SUPPLY MONITOR LOGIC Vdc1 Start Vdc1 Lower Limit & Vdc 1 Trip Vdc1 Upper Limit Vdc1 Status Enabled InhibitDC SupMon V01220 Figure 165: DC Supply Monitor logic The diagram shows the DC Supply Monitoring logic for stage 1 only. Stages 2 and 3 are identical in principle. The logic function will work when the setting the Vdc1 status cell to enabled and the DC Supply Monitoring inhibit signal (InhibitDC SupMon) is low.
-
Page 342: Voltage Transformer Supervision
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION The Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) function is used to detect failure of the AC voltage inputs to the protection. This may be caused by voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the wiring, which usually results in one or more of the voltage transformer fuses blowing.
-
Page 343: Vts Implementation
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision If the line is closed where a three-phase VT failure is present, the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS block will be applied. Closing onto a three-phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent detector and prevent a VTS block being applied.
-
Page 344: Vts Acceleration Indication Logic
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D All Poles Dead VTS I> Inhibit VTS I> Inhibit VTS I> Inhibit VTS PickupThresh & & VTS PickupThresh & VTS Slow Block VTS PickupThresh Delta IA & VTS Fast Block Hardcoded threshold Delta IB & Hardcoded threshold Delta IC Hardcoded threshold…
-
Page 345: Current Transformer Supervision
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION The Current Transformer Supervision function (CTS) is used to detect failure of the AC current inputs to the protection. This may be caused by internal current transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the wiring. If there is a failure of the AC current input, the protection could misinterpret this as a failure of the actual phase currents on the power system, which could result in maloperation.
-
Page 346
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the element can be disabled to prevent protection elements being blocked during fault conditions. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 347: Trip Circuit Supervision
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION In most protection schemes, the trip circuit extends beyond the IED enclosure and passes through components such as links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and other terminal boards. Such complex arrangements may require dedicated schemes for their supervision. There are two distinctly separate parts to the trip circuit;…
-
Page 348: Psl For Tcs Scheme 1
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D Trip Circuit Voltage Resistor R1 30/34 820 Ohms at 2 Watts 48/54 1.2 kOhms at 5 Watts 110/125 2.7 kOhms at 10 Watts 220/250 5.2 kOhms at 15 Watts Warning: If your IED has Opto Mode settings (Opto 9 Mode, Opto 10 Mode, Opto 11 Mode) in the OPTO CONFIG column, these settings MUST be set to TCS.
-
Page 349: Resistor Values
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision Trip Output Relay Trip coil Trip path Opto-input 1 Circuit Breaker Opto-input 2 V01215 Figure 171: TCS Scheme 2 When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input 1 and the trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through opto input 2 and the trip coil.
-
Page 350: Resistor Values
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D Output Relay Trip coil Trip path Opto-input Circuit Breaker V01216 Figure 173: TCS Scheme 3 When the CB is closed, supervision current passes through the opto-input, resistor R2 and the trip coil. When the CB is open, current flows through the opto-input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. The supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in either state, therefore providing pre- closing supervision.
-
Page 351: Resistor Values
P14D Chapter 15 — Supervision In the diagram below, Opto-input 1 and Opto-input 2 would correlate to one of the above-mentioned opto-inputs. Trip Output Relay Trip coil Trip path Opto-input 1 Circuit Breaker Opto-input 2 V01222 Figure 175: TCS Scheme 4 Under normal non-fault conditions, a current of 2 mA flows through one of the following paths: a) Post Close Supervision: When the CB is in a closed state, the current flows through R1, Opto-input 1, Contact 52A and the trip coil.
-
Page 352: Psl For Tcs Scheme 4
Chapter 15 — Supervision P14D Warning: If your IED has Opto Mode settings (Opto 9 Mode, Opto 10 Mode, Opto 11 Mode) in the OPTO CONFIG column, these settings MUST be set to TCS. 5.4.2 PSL FOR TCS SCHEME 4 Opto input 1 Dropoff *Output Relay…
-
Page 353: Chapter 16 Digital I/O And Psl Configuration
CHAPTER 16 DIGITAL I/O AND PSL CONFIGURATION…
-
Page 354
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 355: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter introduces the PSL (Programmable Scheme Logic) Editor, and describes the configuration of the digital inputs and outputs. It provides an outline of scheme logic concepts and the PSL Editor. This is followed by details about allocation of the digital inputs and outputs, which require the use of the PSL Editor.
-
Page 356: Configuring Digital Inputs And Outputs
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D CONFIGURING DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Configuration of the digital inputs and outputs in this product is very flexible. You can use a combination of settings and programmable logic to customise them to your application. You can access some of the settings using the keypad on the front panel, but you will need a computer running the settings application software to fully interrogate and configure the properties of the digital inputs and outputs.
-
Page 357: Scheme Logic
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration SCHEME LOGIC The product is supplied with pre-loaded Fixed Scheme Logic (FSL) and Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL). The Scheme Logic is a functional module within the IED, through which all mapping of inputs to outputs is handled. The scheme logic can be split into two parts;…
-
Page 358: Psl Editor
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D PSL EDITOR The Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) is a module of programmable logic gates and timers in the IED, which can be used to create customised logic to qualify how the product manages its response to system conditions. The IED’s digital inputs are combined with internally generated digital signals using logic gates, timers, and conditioners.
-
Page 359: Configuring The Opto-Inputs
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration CONFIGURING THE OPTO-INPUTS The number of optically isolated status inputs (opto-inputs) depends on the specific model supplied. The use of the inputs will depend on the application, and their allocation is defined in the programmable scheme logic (PSL). In addition to the PSL assignment, you also need to specify the expected input voltage.
-
Page 360: Assigning The Output Relays
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D ASSIGNING THE OUTPUT RELAYS Relay contact action is controlled using the PSL. DDB signals are mapped in the PSL and drive the output relays. The driving of an output relay is controlled by means of a relay output conditioner. Several choices are available for how output relay contacts are conditioned.
-
Page 361: Fixed Function Leds
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration FIXED FUNCTION LEDS Four fixed-function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel indicate the following conditions. Trip (Red) switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is ●…
-
Page 362: Configuring Programmable Leds
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D CONFIGURING PROGRAMMABLE LEDS There are three types of programmable LED signals which vary according to the model being used. These are: Single-colour programmable LED. These are red when illuminated. ● Tri-colour programmable LED. These can be illuminated red, green, or amber. ●…
-
Page 363
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration Note: All LED DDB signals are always shown in the PSL Editor. However, the actual number of LEDs depends on the device hardware. For example, if a small 20TE device has only 4 programmable LEDs, LEDs 5-8 will not take effect even if they are mapped in the PSL. -
Page 364: Function Keys
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D FUNCTION KEYS For most models, a number of programmable function keys are available. This allows you to assign function keys to control functionality via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). Each function key is associated with a programmable tri-colour LED, which you can program to give the desired indication on activation of the function key.
-
Page 365: Control Inputs
P14D Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration CONTROL INPUTS The control inputs are software switches, which can be set or reset locally or remotely. These inputs can be used to trigger any PSL function to which they are connected. There are three setting columns associated with the control inputs: CONTROL INPUTS, CTRL I/P CONFIG and CTRL I/P LABELS.
-
Page 366: Inter-Psl Inputs And Outputs
Chapter 16 — Digital I/O and PSL Configuration P14D INTER-PSL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS To make the design of PSL schemes easier, P40 Agile provides a range of DDB signals for conncting PSL Inputs to PSL Outputs. these are called Inter-PSL inputs and outputs. This facility allows you to map many PSL input signals to a single Inter-PSL output signal, many PSL output signals to a single Inter-PSL input signal, and to join the Inter- PSL input signal to an Inter-PSL output signal.
-
Page 367: Chapter 17 Communications
CHAPTER 17 COMMUNICATIONS…
-
Page 368
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 369: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications CHAPTER OVERVIEW This product supports Substation Automation System (SAS), and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) communication. The support embraces the evolution of communications technologies that have taken place since microprocessor technologies were introduced into protection, control, and monitoring devices which are now ubiquitously known as Intelligent Electronic Devices for the substation (IEDs).
-
Page 370: Communication Interfaces
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D COMMUNICATION INTERFACES The MiCOM P40 Agile products have a number of standard and optional communication interfaces. The standard and optional hardware and protocols are summarised below: Port Availability Physical Layer Data Protocols Local settings Front…
-
Page 371: Serial Communication
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications SERIAL COMMUNICATION The physical layer standards that are used for serial communications for SCADA purposes are: Universal Serial Bus (USB) ● EIA(RS)485 (often abbreviated to RS485) ● ● K-Bus (a proprietary customization of RS485) USB is a relatively new standard, which replaces EIA(RS232) for local communication with the IED (for transferring settings and downloading firmware updates) RS485 is similar to RS232 but for longer distances and it allows daisy-chaining and multi-dropping of IEDs.
-
Page 372: Eia(Rs)485 Biasing Requirements
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D 3.2.1 EIA(RS)485 BIASING REQUIREMENTS Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1 V. There should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean to prevent noise being injected.
-
Page 373: Figure 180: Remote Communication Using K-Bus
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications RS232 K-Bus Computer RS232-USB converter KITZ protocol converter V01001 Figure 180: Remote communication using K-Bus Note: An RS232-USB converter is only needed if the local computer does not provide an RS232 port. Further information about K-Bus is available in the publication R6509: K-Bus Interface Guide, which is available on request.
-
Page 374: Standard Ethernet Communication
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D STANDARD ETHERNET COMMUNICATION The Ethernet interface is required for either IEC 61850 or DNP3 over Ethernet (protocol must be selected at time of order). With either of these protocols, the Ethernet interface also offers communication with MiCOM S1 Studio for remote configuration and record extraction.
-
Page 375: Redundant Ethernet Communication
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications REDUNDANT ETHERNET COMMUNICATION Redundancy is required where a single point of failure cannot be tolerated. It is required in critical applications such as substation automation. Redundancy acts as an insurance policy, providing an alternative route if one route fails.
-
Page 376: High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (Hsr)
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Boxes (sometimes abbreviated to RedBox). Devices with a single Ethernet port that connect to both LANs by means of a RedBox are known as Virtual DAN (VDAN). The figure below summarises DAN, SAN, VDAN, LAN, and RedBox connectivity. LAN B LAN A REDUNDANCY…
-
Page 377: Hsr Unicast Topology
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Source DANH DANH Redbox Switch C frame D frame D frame A frame B frame Singly Attached Nodes D frame D frame D frame DANH DANH DANH V01030 Figure 182: HSR multicast topology Only about half of the network bandwidth is available in HSR for multicast or broadcast frames because both duplicate frames A &…
-
Page 378: Hsr Application In The Substation
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D For unicast frames, the whole bandwidth is available as both frames A & B stop at the destination node. 5.3.3 HSR APPLICATION IN THE SUBSTATION T1000 switch PC SCADA DS Agile gateways Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x Px4x…
-
Page 379: Configuring Ip Address
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications RSTP can recover network faults quickly, but the fault recovery time depends on the number of devices on the network and the network topology. A typical figure for the fault recovery time is 300ms. Therefore, RSTP cannot achieve the “bumpless”…
-
Page 380: Data Protocols
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D DATA PROTOCOLS The products supports a wide range of protocols to make them applicable to many industries and applications. The exact data protocols supported by a particular product depend on its chosen application, but the following table gives a list of the data protocols that are typically available.
-
Page 381: Settings Categories
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, for example, 0A02 is column 0A row 02. Associated settings or data are part of the same column. Row zero of the column has a text string to identify the contents of the column and to act as a column heading.
-
Page 382
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Once an event has been extracted, the Accept Event command can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. When all events have been extracted, the Event bit is reset. If there are more events still to be extracted, the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before. -
Page 383: Disturbance Record Extraction
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications event number value returned in the record. The extended data can be extracted from the IED by uploading the text and data from the column. 6.1.6 DISTURBANCE RECORD EXTRACTION The stored disturbance records are accessible through the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column (B4).
-
Page 384
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol Courier Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the address of the RP1 port on thje device. Up to 32 IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only. -
Page 385: Physical Connection And Link Layer
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Comms Mode IEC 60870 FT1.2 If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell down controls the baud rate. Three baud rates are supported; 9600, 19200 and 38400. If using K-Bus this cell will not appear as the baud rate is fixed at 64 kbps. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Baud rate 19200…
-
Page 386: Time Synchronisation
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D The device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5. The Cause of Transmission (COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is described in the IEC 60870-5-103 section of the Menu Database, available from General Electric separately if required.
-
Page 387: Command/Monitor Blocking
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Note: IEC 60870-5-103 only supports up to 8 records. 6.2.10 COMMAND/MONITOR BLOCKING The device supports a facility to block messages in the monitor direction (data from the device) and also in the command direction (data to the device). Messages can be blocked in the monitor and command directions using one of the two following methods The menu command RP1 CS103Blcking in the COMMUNICATIONS column ●…
-
Page 388: Dnp
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Meas Period 30.00 s If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted, the RP1 PhysicalLink cell is visible. This cell controls the physical media used for the communication (Copper or Fibre optic). COMMUNICATIONS RP1 PhysicalLink Copper The next cell down (RP1 CS103Blcking) can be used for monitor or command blocking.
-
Page 389: Object 1 Binary Inputs
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications With DNP3 Over Ethernet, a maximum of 10 Clients can be configured. They are configured using the DNP3 Configurator The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by a suitable application such as MiCOM Agile.
-
Page 390: Object 20 Binary Counters
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Examples of Object 10 points that maybe reported as off-line are: Activate setting groups: Ensure setting groups are enabled ● ● CB trip/close: Ensure remote CB control is enabled Reset NPS thermal: Ensure NPS thermal protection is enabled ●…
-
Page 391: Dnp3 Device Profile
6.3.8 DNP3 DEVICE PROFILE This section describes the specific implementation of DNP version 3.0 within General Electric MiCOM P40 Agile IEDs for both compact and modular ranges. The devices use the DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library version 3 from Triangle MicroWorks Inc.
-
Page 392
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document Requires Application Layer Confirmation: When reporting event data (Slave devices only) When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Configurable Complete Application Fragment: None Application Confirm: Configurable Complete Application Response:… -
Page 393
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document Append File Mode Custom Status Code Strings Permissions Field File Events Assigned to Class File Events Send Immediately Multiple Blocks in a Fragment Max Number of Files Open 6.3.8.2 DNP3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE The implementation table provides a list of objects, variations and control codes supported by the device: Request Response… -
Page 394
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Request Response Object (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex) Object Variation Description (dec) Number Number (hex) 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01… -
Page 395
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Request Response Object (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex) Object Variation Description (dec) Number Number (hex) 16-Bit Analog Input (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) -
Page 396
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Request Response Object (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex) Object Variation Description (dec) Number Number (hex) 16-Bit Analog Output Status (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 response 00, 01 (start-stop) -
Page 397
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Note: A Default variation refers to the variation responded to when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Note: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded to when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. -
Page 398
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Indication Description Supported The relay does not have the specified objects or there are no objects assigned to the requested class. Requested object(s) unknown This IIN should be used for debugging purposes and usually indicates a mismatch in device profiles or configuration problems. -
Page 399: Dnp3 Configuration
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications 6.3.9 DNP3 CONFIGURATION To configure the device: Select the CONFIGURATION column and check that the Comms settings cell is set to Visible. Select the COMMUNICATIONS column. Move to the first cell down (RP1 protocol). This is a non-settable cell, which shows the chosen communication protocol –…
-
Page 400: Dnp3 Unsolicited Reporting
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D COMMUNICATIONS RP1 PhysicalLink Copper Move down to the next cell (RP1 Time Sync). This cell affects the time synchronisation request from the master by the IED. It can be set to enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP3.0 master to synchronise the time on the IED.
-
Page 401: Physical Connection And Link Layer
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications 6.4.1 PHYSICAL CONNECTION AND LINK LAYER Only one option is available for connecting MODBUS Rear serial port 1 — for permanent SCADA connection via EIA(RS)485 ● The MODBUS interface uses ‘RTU’ mode communication rather than ‘ASCII’ mode as this provides more efficient use of the communication bandwidth.
-
Page 402: Register Mapping
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D 6.4.4 REGISTER MAPPING The device supports the following memory page references: Memory Page: Interpretation ● 0xxxx: Read and write access of the output relays ● 1xxxx: Read only access of the opto inputs ● 3xxxx: Read only access of data ●…
-
Page 403: Disturbance Record Extraction
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record. The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of record stored. 30100: Number of stored records ●…
-
Page 404
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D MODBUS registers MODBUS Register Name Description Provides the status of the relay as bit flags: b0: Out of service b1: Minor self test failure b2: Event b3: Time synchronization 3×00001 Status register b4: Disturbance b5: Fault b6: Trip b7: Alarm b8 to b15: Unused… -
Page 405
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Disturbance record states State Description This will be the state reported when no record is selected; such as after power on or after a record has been Idle marked as extracted. Busy The relay is currently processing data. Page ready The data page has been populated and the master station can now safely read the data. -
Page 406: Figure 187: Manual Selection Of A Disturbance Record
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Start Get number of disturbances from register 3×00800 Are there disturbances? Get oldest disturbance ID from register 3×00801 Select required disturbance by writing the ID value of the required record to register 4×00250 Get disturbance time stamp Extract disturbance data from registers 3×00930 –…
-
Page 407: Figure 188: Automatic Selection Of Disturbance Record — Method 1
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Start Read status word from register 3×0001 Is disturbance bit (bit 4) set? Error Select next oldest non- extracted record by writing 0x04 to register 4×00400 Send command to accept Extract disturbance data record by writing 0x08 to register 4×00400 V01004 Figure 188: Automatic selection of disturbance record — method 1…
-
Page 408: Figure 189: Automatic Selection Of Disturbance Record — Method 2
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Start FirstTime = True Read status word from register 3×0001 FirstTime = True Is disturbance bit (bit 4) set? Select next oldest non- Is FirstTime = extracted record by writing True? 0x04 to register 4×00400 FirstTime = False Send command to accept Error…
-
Page 409: Figure 190: Configuration File Extraction
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Extracting the Comtrade configuration file Start (Record selected) To parent procedure Busy Read DR status value from register 3×00934 Check DR status for error conditions or Error Busy status Configuration complete Other What is the value of DR status? Page ready Read number of…
-
Page 410: Figure 191: Data File Extraction
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Extracting the comtrade data file Start (Configuration complete) Send ‘Select Data File’ to register 4×00400 To parent procedure Busy Read DR status value from register 3×00934 Check DR status for error conditions or Error Busy status Record complete Other What is the value…
-
Page 411: Setting Changes
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Value State Description No unextracted An attempt was made by the master station to automatically select the next oldest unextracted disturbances disturbance when all records have been extracted. Not a valid disturbance An attempt was made by the master station to manually select a record that did not exist in the relay. Command out of The master station issued a command to the relay that was not expected during the extraction process.
-
Page 412: Time Synchronisation
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D 6.4.10 TIME SYNCHRONISATION The date-time data type G12 allows real date and time information to be conveyed to a resolution of 1 ms. The structure of the data type is compliant with the IEC 60870-5-4 Binary Time 2a format. The seven bytes of the date/time frame are packed into four 16-bit registers and are transmitted in sequence starting from byte 1.
-
Page 413: Power And Energy Measurement Data Formats
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications 6.4.11 POWER AND ENERGY MEASUREMENT DATA FORMATS The power and energy measurements are available in two data formats: Data Type G29: an integer format using 3 registers Data Type G125: a 32 bit floating point format using 2 registers The G29 registers are listed in the first part of the MEASUREMENTS 2 column of the Courier database.
-
Page 414: Modbus Configuration
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Register Address Data read from these registers Format of the data 3×00329 57928 The Equivalent G27 value = [2 * Value in the address 3×00328 + Value in the address 3×00329] = 216*2 + 57928 = 189000 The Equivalent value of power G29 = G28 * Equivalent G27 =116 * 189000 =21.92 MW Note:…
-
Page 415: Iec 61850
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Six baud rates are supported by the IED 1200 bits/s, 2400 bits/s, 4800 bits/s, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. Make sure that the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
-
Page 416: Iec 61850 Interoperability
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D Ethernet, which is becoming more and more widely used in substations, in favour of RS485. Using Ethernet in the substation offers many advantages, most significantly including: Ethernet allows high-speed data rates (currently 100 Mbps, rather than tens of kbps or less used by most ●…
-
Page 417: Iec 61850 In Micom Ieds
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications Layer Description Identifies the major functional areas within the IEC 61850 data model. Either 3 or 6 characters are used as a prefix to define the functional group (wrapper) while the actual functionality is identified by a 4 character Logical Node name suffixed by an instance number.
-
Page 418: Iec 61850 Peer-To-Peer (Goose) Communications
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D 6.5.7 IEC 61850 PEER-TO-PEER (GOOSE) COMMUNICATIONS The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) enables faster communication between IEDs offering the possibility for a fast and reliable system-wide distribution of input and output data values.
-
Page 419: Iec 61850 Configuration
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications 6.5.9.2 LOSS OF POWER The IED allows the re-establishment of associations without disruption of its operation, even after its power has been removed. As the IED acts as a server in this process, the client must request the association. Uncommitted settings are cancelled when power is lost, and reports requested by connected clients are reset.
-
Page 420
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D The IED can be configured to accept data from other networks using the Gateway setting. If multiple networks are used, the IP addresses must be unique across networks. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 421: Read Only Mode
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications READ ONLY MODE With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become an important issue. For this reason, all relevant General Electric IEDs have been adapted to comply with the latest cyber-security standards. In addition to this, a facility is provided which allows you to enable or disable the communication interfaces. This feature is available for products using Courier, IEC 60870-5-103, or IEC 61850.
-
Page 422: Iec 61850 Protocol Blocking
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D The following commands are still allowed: Read settings, statuses, measurands ● ● Read records (event, fault, disturbance) Time Synchronisation ● Change active setting group ● IEC 61850 PROTOCOL BLOCKING If Read-Only Mode is enabled for the Ethernet interfacing with IEC 61850, the following commands are blocked at the interface: All controls, including: ●…
-
Page 423: Time Synchronisation
P14D Chapter 17 — Communications TIME SYNCHRONISATION In modern protection schemes it is necessary to synchronise the IED’s real time clock so that events from different devices can be time stamped and placed in chronological order. This is achieved in various ways depending on the chosen options and communication protocols.
-
Page 424: Sntp
Chapter 17 — Communications P14D 30TE models however, it is possible to have IRIG-B in one slot and a serial port in another, provided this option is ordered. To set the device to use IRIG-B, use the setting IRIG-B Sync cell in the DATE AND TIME column. This can be set to None (for no IRIG-B), RP1 (for the option where IRIG-B uses terminals 54 and 56) and RP2 (for the option where IRIG-B uses terminals 82 and 84) The IRIG-B status can be viewed in the IRIG-B Status cell in the DATE AND TIME column.
-
Page 425: Chapter 18 Cyber-Security
CHAPTER 18 CYBER-SECURITY…
-
Page 426
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 427: Overview
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security OVERVIEW In the past, substation networks were traditionally isolated and the protocols and data formats used to transfer information between devices were often proprietary. For these reasons, the substation environment was very secure against cyber-attacks. The terms used for this inherent type of security are: Security by isolation (if the substation network is not connected to the outside world, it cannot be accessed ●…
-
Page 428: The Need For Cyber-Security
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D THE NEED FOR CYBER-SECURITY Cyber-security provides protection against unauthorised disclosure, transfer, modification, or destruction of information or information systems, whether accidental or intentional. To achieve this, there are several security requirements: Confidentiality (preventing unauthorised access to information) ●…
-
Page 429: Standards
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security STANDARDS There are several standards, which apply to substation cyber-security. The standards currently applicable to General Electric IEDs are NERC and IEEE1686. Standard Country Description NERC CIP (North American Electric Reliability Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber Assets Corporation) BDEW (German Association of Energy and Water Requirements for Secure Control and Telecommunication…
-
Page 430: Cip 002
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D 3.1.1 CIP 002 CIP 002 concerns itself with the identification of: Critical assets, such as overhead lines and transformers ● Critical cyber assets, such as IEDs that use routable protocols to communicate outside or inside the ●…
-
Page 431: Cip 007
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security Power utility responsibilities: General Electric’s contribution: Provide physical security controls and perimeter monitoring. General Electric cannot provide additional help with this aspect. Ensure that people who have access to critical cyber assets don’t have criminal records. 3.1.6 CIP 007 CIP 007 covers the following points:…
-
Page 432
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D IED functions and features are assigned to different password levels. The assignment is fixed. ● The audit trail is recorded, listing events in the order in which they occur, held in a circular buffer. ● Records contain all defined fields from the standard and record all defined function event types where the ●… -
Page 433: Cyber-Security Implementation
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security CYBER-SECURITY IMPLEMENTATION The General Electric IEDs have always been and will continue to be equipped with state-of-the-art security measures. Due to the ever-evolving communication technology and new threats to security, this requirement is not static. Hardware and software security measures are continuously being developed and implemented to mitigate the associated threats and risks.
-
Page 434: Four-Level Access
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D NERC compliant banner NERC Compliance NERC Compliance Warning Warning System Current Access Level Measurements System Voltage System Frequency Measurements System Power Plant Reference Measurements Description Date & Time V00403 Figure 194: Default display navigation FOUR-LEVEL ACCESS The menu structure contains four levels of access, three of which are password protected.
-
Page 435: Blank Passwords
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation All items writeable at level 1. Setting Cells that change visibility (Visible/Invisible). Setting Values (Primary/Secondary) selector Commands: Read All All data and settings are readable. Reset Indication Write Some Poll Measurements Reset Demand Reset Statistics…
-
Page 436: Access Level Ddbs
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D Passwords may or may not be NERC compliant ● Passwords may contain any ASCII character in the range ASCII code 33 (21 Hex) to ASCII code 122 (7A Hex) ● inclusive ● Only one password is required for all the IED interfaces 4.2.3 ACCESS LEVEL DDBS In addition to having the ‘Access level’ cell in the ‘System data’ column (address 00D0), the current level of access…
-
Page 437: Password Blocking
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security If the entered password is NERC compliant, the following text is displayed. NERC COMPLIANT P/WORD WAS SAVED If the password entered is not NERC-compliant, the user is required to actively confirm this, in which case the non- compliance is logged.
-
Page 438: Password Recovery
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D A similar response occurs if you try to enter the password through a communications port. The parameters can then be configured using the Attempts Limit, Attempts Timer and Blocking Timer settings in the SECURITY CONFIG column. Password blocking configuration Cell Setting…
-
Page 439: Password Encryption
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security The recovery password can be applied through any interface, local or remote. It will achieve the same result irrespective of which interface it is applied through. 4.4.2 PASSWORD ENCRYPTION The IED supports encryption for passwords entered remotely. The encryption key can be read from the IED through a specific cell available only through communication interfaces, not the front panel.
-
Page 440: Security Events Management
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D SECURITY EVENTS MANAGEMENT To implement NERC-compliant cyber-security, a range of Event records need to be generated. These log security issues such as the entry of a non-NERC-compliant password, or the selection of a non-NERC-compliant default display.
-
Page 441
P14D Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security Event Value Display PSL CONFG D/LOAD PSL CONFIG DOWNLOADED BY {int} GROUP {grp} SETTINGS D/LOAD SETTINGS DOWNLOADED BY {int} GROUP {grp} PSL STNG UPLOAD PSL SETTINGS UPLOADED BY {int} GROUP {grp} DNP STNG UPLOAD DNP SETTINGS UPLOADED BY {int} TRACE DAT UPLOAD TRACE DATA UPLOADED… -
Page 442: Logging Out
Chapter 18 — Cyber-Security P14D LOGGING OUT If you have been configuring the IED, you should ‘log out’. Do this by going up to the top of the menu tree. When you are at the Column Heading level and you press the Up button, you may be prompted to log out with the following display: DO YOU WANT TO LOG OUT?
-
Page 443: Chapter 19 Installation
CHAPTER 19 INSTALLATION…
-
Page 444
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 445: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides information about installing the product. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Handling the Goods Mounting the Device Cables and Connectors Case Dimensions P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 446: Handling The Goods
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D HANDLING THE GOODS Our products are of robust construction but require careful treatment before installation on site. This section discusses the requirements for receiving and unpacking the goods, as well as associated considerations regarding product care and personal safety. Caution: Before lifting or moving the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety Information chapter of this manual.
-
Page 447: Mounting The Device
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation MOUNTING THE DEVICE The products are available in the following forms For flush panel and rack mounting ● For retrofitting K-series models ● ● Software only (for upgrades) FLUSH PANEL MOUNTING Panel-mounted devices are flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3 mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
-
Page 448: Figure 195: Rack Mounting Of Products
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D Figure 195: Rack mounting of products Products can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements using the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from different product ranges to be pre-wired together before mounting. Use blanking plates to fill any empty spaces.
-
Page 449: K-Series Retrofit
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation Case size summation Blanking plate part number 35TE GJ2028 107 40TE GJ2028 108 K-SERIES RETROFIT A major advantage of the P40 Agile platform is its backward compatibility with the K-series products. The P40 Agile products have been designed such that the case, back panel terminal layout and pin-outs are identical to their K- series predecessors and can be retrofitted without the usual overhead associated with replacing and rewiring devices.
-
Page 450: Figure 197: Spring-Loaded Ct Shorting Contacts
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D ensure that the terminals into which the CTs connect are shorted before the CT contacts are broken, when withdrawing the cradle from the case. This ensures that no voltage is developed between the two terminals on breaking the CT connections.
-
Page 451: Conventions
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation Caution: The voltage on terminals 7 and 8 mirrors that of the auxiliary supply voltage. If the auxiliary supply voltage on terminals 13 and 14 is not 48 V DC, then the voltage on terminals 7 and 8 is also not 48 V DC. Caution: When retrofitting a K-series device, ensure the load on terminals 7 and 8 is limited to a maximum of 5A.
-
Page 452
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D Caution: Do not attempt to upgrade an existing device if the software has not been licensed for that speciific device. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 453: Cables And Connectors
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation CABLES AND CONNECTORS This section describes the type of wiring and connections that should be used when installing the device. For pin- out details please refer to the Hardware Design chapter or the wiring diagrams. Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
-
Page 454: Earth Connnection
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D Caution: Protect the auxiliary power supply wiring with a maximum 16 A high rupture capacity (HRC) type NIT or TIA fuse. EARTH CONNNECTION Every device must be connected to the cubicle earthing bar using the M4 earth terminal. Use a wire size of at least 2.5 mm terminated with a ring terminal.
-
Page 455: Watchdog Connections
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation WATCHDOG CONNECTIONS These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals. The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS. EIA(RS)485 AND K-BUS CONNECTIONS For connecting the EIA(RS485) / K-Bus ports, use 2-core screened cable with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
-
Page 456: Opto-Input Connections
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D OPTO-INPUT CONNECTIONS These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals. Each opto-input has a selectable preset ½ cycle filter. This makes the input immune to noise induced on the wiring. This can, however slow down the response.
-
Page 457: Case Dimensions
P14D Chapter 19 — Installation CASE DIMENSIONS 99.0mm A = Clearance holes 10.5mm 78.0mm B = Mounting holes 159.0mm 168.0mm 243.1mm 23.5mm 52.0mm 8 holes 3.4mm 213.1mm 177.0mm 102.4mm E01403 Figure 200: 20TE case dimensions P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 458: Figure 201: 30Te Case Dimensions
Chapter 19 — Installation P14D 151.0mm 10.75 129.5mm A = Clearance hole B = Mounting hole 159.0mm 168.0mm 242.7mm 8 holes 3.4mm 23.7mm 103.6mm 213.1mm 177.0mm 154.2mm E01404 Figure 201: 30TE case dimensions P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 459: Chapter 20 Commissioning Instructions
CHAPTER 20 COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS…
-
Page 460
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 461: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview General Guidelines Commissioning Test Menu Commissioning Equipment Product Checks Setting Checks Protection Timing Checks Onload Checks Final Checks P14D-TM-EN-8…
-
Page 462: General Guidelines
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D GENERAL GUIDELINES General Electric IEDs are self-checking devices and will raise an alarm in the unlikely event of a failure. This is why the commissioning tests are less extensive than those for non-numeric electronic devices or electro-mechanical relays.
-
Page 463: Commissioning Test Menu
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions COMMISSIONING TEST MENU The IED provides several test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are menu cells that allow you to monitor the status of the opto-inputs, output relay contacts, internal Digital Data Bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs.
-
Page 464: Test Pattern Cell
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D Caution: When the cell is in Test Mode, the Scheme Logic still drives the output relays, which could result in tripping of circuit breakers. To avoid this, set the Test Mode cell to Contacts Blocked. Note: Test mode and Contacts Blocked mode can also be selected by energising an opto-input mapped to the Test Mode signal, and the Contact Block signal respectively.
-
Page 465
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions Note: When the status in both Red LED Status and Green LED Status cells is ‘1’, this indicates the LEDs illumination is yellow. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 466: Commissioning Equipment
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT Specialist test equipment is required to commission this product. We recognise three classes of equipment for commissioning : Recommended ● Essential ● Advisory ● Recommended equipment constitutes equipment that is both necessary, and sufficient, to verify correct performance of the principal protection functions.
-
Page 467: Advisory Test Equipment
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions ADVISORY TEST EQUIPMENT Advisory test equipment may be required for extended commissioning procedures: Current clamp meter ● ● Multi-finger test plug: P992 for test block type P991 ○ ○ MMLB for test block type MMLG blocks Electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V ●…
-
Page 468: Product Checks
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D PRODUCT CHECKS These product checks are designed to ensure that the device has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and that all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the IED prior to commissioning, you should make a copy of the settings.
-
Page 469: Insulation
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions Check that the current transformer shorting switches in the case are wired into the correct circuit. Ensure that, during withdrawal, they are closed by checking with a continuity tester. The shorting switches are between terminals 21 and 22, 23 and 24, 25 and 26, and 27 and 28.
-
Page 470: Product Checks With The Ied Energised
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D PRODUCT CHECKS WITH THE IED ENERGISED Warning: The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the IED for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. The following group of tests verifies that the IED hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the supply applied to the IED.
-
Page 471: Test Leds
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions 5.2.4 TEST LEDS On power-up, all LEDs should first flash yellow. Following this, the green «Healthy» LED should illuminate indicating that the device is healthy. The IED’s non-volatile memory stores the states of the alarm, the trip, and the user-programmable LED indicators (if configured to latch).
-
Page 472: Test Serial Communication Port Rp1
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D Reset the output relay by setting the Contact Test cell to Remove Test. Repeat the test for the remaining output relays. Return the IED to service by setting the Test Mode cell in the COMMISSION TESTS menu to Disabled. 5.2.10 TEST SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORT RP1 You need only perform this test if the IED is to be accessed from a remote location with a permanent serial…
-
Page 473: Test Serial Communication Port Rp2
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions RS232 K-Bus Computer RS232-USB converter KITZ protocol converter V01001 Figure 203: Remote communication using K-bus 5.2.10.2 CHECK LOGICAL CONNECTIVITY The logical connectivity depends on the chosen data protocol, but the principles of testing remain the same for all protocol variants: Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those on the protocol converter.
-
Page 474: Test Voltage Inputs
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D All devices leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50 Hz. If operation at 60 Hz is required then this must be set in the Frequency cell in the SYSTEM DATA column. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each current transformer input in turn.
-
Page 475
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions Corresponding VT ratio Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 (in CT AND VT RATIOS column) C/S Voltage Mag C/S VT Primary / C/S VT Secondary P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 476: Setting Checks
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D SETTING CHECKS The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific settings (both the IED’s function and programmable scheme logic settings) have been correctly applied. Note: If applicable, the trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
-
Page 477
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used. When all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the down cursor key. Before returning to the default display, the following prompt appears. Update settings? ENTER or CLEAR Press the Enter key to accept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new settings. -
Page 478: Protection Timing Checks
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D PROTECTION TIMING CHECKS There is no need to check every protection function. Only one protection function needs to be checked as the purpose is to verify the timing on the processor is functioning correctly. OVERCURRENT CHECK If the overcurrent protection function is being used, test the overcurrent protection for stage 1.
-
Page 479
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions Operating time at twice current setting and time multiplier/ Characteristic time dial setting of 1.0 Nominal (seconds) Range (seconds) IEEE M Inverse 3.61 — 4.0 IEEE V Inverse 7.03 6.68 — 7.38 IEEE E Inverse 9.50 9.02 — 9.97 US Inverse… -
Page 480: Onload Checks
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D ONLOAD CHECKS Warning: Onload checks are potentially very dangerous and may only be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Onload checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant, and the other devices in the group have already been commissioned.
-
Page 481: On-Load Directional Test
P14D Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
-
Page 482: Final Checks
Chapter 20 — Commissioning Instructions P14D FINAL CHECKS Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads. If you have had to disconnect any of the external wiring in order to perform the wiring verification tests, replace all wiring, fuses and links in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during testing.
-
Page 483: Chapter 21 Maintenance And Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 21 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING…
-
Page 484
Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 485: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting CHAPTER OVERVIEW The Maintenance and Troubleshooting chapter provides details of how to maintain and troubleshoot products based on the Px4x and P40Agile platforms. Always follow the warning signs in this chapter. Failure to do so may result injury or defective equipment.
-
Page 486: Maintenance
Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting P14D MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE CHECKS In view of the critical nature of the application, General Electric products should be checked at regular intervals to confirm they are operating correctly. General Electric products are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. The devices are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of protection devices.
-
Page 487: Replacing The Unit
P14D Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting REPLACING THE UNIT If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. In the case of a fault, you should normally replace the cradle which slides easily out of the case.
-
Page 488: Troubleshooting
Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting P14D TROUBLESHOOTING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE The device includes several self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software while in service. If there is a problem with the hardware or software, it should be able to detect and report the problem, and attempt to resolve the problem by performing a reboot.
-
Page 489: Out Of Service Led On At Power-Up
P14D Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting Test Check Action Programmable scheme logic error due to excessive execution time. Restore the default settings by powering up with both horizontal cursor keys pressed, then confirm restoration of defaults at the prompt using The IED resets when the power-up is complete.
-
Page 490: Mal-Operation During Testing
Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting P14D MAL-OPERATION DURING TESTING 3.6.1 FAILURE OF OUTPUT CONTACTS An apparent failure of the relay output contacts can be caused by the configuration. Perform the following tests to identify the real cause of the failure. The self-tests verify that the coils of the output relay contacts have been energized.
-
Page 491: Diagram Reconstruction
P14D Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting Communication set-up (COM port, Baud rate, or Framing) is not correct ● Transaction values are not suitable for the IED or the type of connection ● The connection cable is not wired correctly or broken ●…
-
Page 492
Chapter 21 — Maintenance and Troubleshooting P14D The local service contact provides the shipping information Your local service contact provides you with all the information needed to ship the product: Pricing details ○ ○ RMA number Repair centre address ○ If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to the next stage. -
Page 493: Chapter 22 Technical Specifications
CHAPTER 22 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS…
-
Page 494
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 495: Chapter Overview
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter describes the technical specifications of the product. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview Interfaces Performance of Current Protection Functions Performance of Voltage Protection Functions Performance of Frequency Protection Functions Power Protection Functions Performance of Monitoring and Control Functions Measurements and Recording…
-
Page 496: Interfaces
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D INTERFACES FRONT USB PORT Front USB port For local connection to laptop for configuration purposes and firmware downloads Connector USB type B Isolation Isolation to ELV level Constraints Maximum cable length 5 m REAR SERIAL PORT 1 Rear serial port 1 (RP1) For SCADA communications (multi-drop) Standard…
-
Page 497: Rear Ethernet Port Copper
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications REAR ETHERNET PORT COPPER Rear Ethernet port using CAT 5/6/7 wiring Main Use Substation Ethernet communications Communication protocol 10BaseT/100BaseTX Connector RJ45 Cable type Screened twisted pair (STP) Isolation 1 kV Supported Protocols IEC 61850, DNP3.0 OE Constraints Maximum cable length 100 m REAR ETHERNET PORT — FIBRE…
-
Page 498: Performance Of Current Protection Functions
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D PERFORMANCE OF CURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS THREE-PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION IDMT pick-up 1.05 x Setting +/-5% DT Pick-up Setting +/- 5% Drop-off (IDMT and DT) 0.95 x setting +/- 5% +/- 5% or 60 ms, whichever is greater (1.05 – <2) Is IDMT operation (for IEC and UK curves) +/- 5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater (2 –…
-
Page 499: Earth Fault Directional Parameters
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications 3.2.1 EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL PARAMETERS Zero Sequence Polarising accuracy Directional boundary pick-up (RCA +/- 90°) +/-2° Hysteresis <3° VN> pick-up Setting+/-10% VN> drop-off 0.9 x Setting +/-10% Negative Sequence Polarising accuracy Directional boundary pick-up (RCA +/- 90°) +/-2°…
-
Page 500: Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D SEF CosΦ accuracy Pick-up Setting +/-5% for angles RCA+/-60° Drop-off 0.9 x setting Repeatability +/- 2% SEF SinΦ accuracy Pick-up Setting +/-5% for angles RCA+/-60° to RCA+/-90° Drop-off 0.9 x setting Repeatability +/- 2% RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION High Impedance Retricted Earth Fault (REF) accuracy Pick-up…
-
Page 501: Circuit Breaker Fail And Undercurrent Protection
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications Directional boundary hysteresis < 1° +/- 5% or 70 ms, whichever is greater (1.05 – <2) Is IDMT operate +/- 5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater (2 – 20) Is IDMT reset < 40 ms +/- 2% or 80 ms, whichever is greater (1.05 –…
-
Page 502: Selective Overcurrent Protection
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D 3.10 SELECTIVE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Fast Block operation < 25 ms Fast Block reset < 30 ms Time delay Setting +/- 2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 3.11 VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION VCO/VRO threshold pick-up Setting +/- 5% Overcurrent pick-up K-factor x setting +/- 5%…
-
Page 503: Performance Of Voltage Protection Functions
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications PERFORMANCE OF VOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Pick-up (IDMT and DT) Setting +/- 5% Drop-off (IDMT and DT) 1.02 x Setting +/-5% +/- 3.5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater (<10 V) IDMT operate +/- 5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater (>10 V) Disnegagement <40 ms…
-
Page 504: Rate Of Change Of Voltage Protection
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D Accuracy +/- 5% or 70 ms, whichever is greater (<45 Hz) DT operate (normal operation) +/- 2% or 65 ms, whichever is greater (45 Hz — 70 Hz) +/- 5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater (<45 Hz) DT operate (accelerated) +/- 2% or 45 ms, whichever is greater (45 Hz — 70 Hz) Repeatability…
-
Page 505: Performance Of Frequency Protection Functions
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications PERFORMANCE OF FREQUENCY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION Accuracy Pick-up Setting +/- 10 mHz Drop-off Setting -20 mHz +/- 10 mHz Operating timer +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater Operating and Reset time Operating time (Fs/Ff ratio less than 2) <125 ms Operating time (Fs/Ff ratio between 2 and 30)
-
Page 506: Independent Rate Of Change Of Frequency Protection
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D Accuracy Drop-off (f, underfrequency) (Setting + 20 mHz) +/- 10 mHz Drop-off (f, overfrequency) (Setting — 20 mHz) +/- 10 mHz Drop-off (df/dt, falling, for settings between 10 mHz/s and (Setting + 5 mHz/s) +/- 10 mHz/s 100 mHz/s) (Setting + 50 mHz/s) +/- 5% or +/- 55 mHz/s, whichever is Drop-off (df/dt, falling, for settings greater than 100 mHz/s)
-
Page 507: Load Restoration
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications Operating time Operating time (Freq. Av Cycles setting = 0) <125 ms Reference conditions: To maintain accuracy, the minimum time delay setting should be: Dt> 0.375 x Df + 0.23 (f0r Df setting <1 Hz) Dt>…
-
Page 508: Power Protection Functions
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D POWER PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERPOWER / UNDERPOWER PROTECTION Pick-up Setting +/- 10% Reverse/Overpower Drop-off 0.95 x Setting +/- 10% Low forward power Drop-off 1.05 x Setting +/- 10% Angle variation pick-up +/- 2° Angle variation drop-off +/- 2.5°…
-
Page 509: Performance Of Monitoring And Control Functions
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications PERFORMANCE OF MONITORING AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION Fast block operation < 25 ms Fast block reset < 40 ms Time delay +/- 2% or 40 ms, whichever is greater CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION IN>…
-
Page 510
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D Tolerance ±1.5 V for 19-100 V ±2% for 100-200 V ±2.5% for 200-300 V Pickup 100% of Setting ± Tolerance * Dropoff Hysteresis 2% 102% of Setting ± Tolerance for the upper limit * 98% of Setting ±… -
Page 511: Measurements And Recording
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING GENERAL General Measurement Accuracy at 20° C General measurement accuracy Typically +/- 1%, but +/- 0.5% between 0.2 — 2 In/Vn 0.05 to 4 In +/- 0.5% of reading (1A input) Current magnitude 0.05 to 4 In +/- 1.0% of reading (5A input) Voltage magnitude…
-
Page 512: Regulatory Compliance
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D REGULATORY COMPLIANCE Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a technical file. EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonised standard(s) or conformit assessment used to demonstrate compliance with the EMC directive.
-
Page 513
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications Where: ‘II’ Equipment Group: Industrial. ‘(2)G’ High protection equipment category, for control of equipment in gas atmospheres in Zone 1 and 2. This equipment (with parentheses marking around the zone number) is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere. -
Page 514: Mechanical Specifications
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10.1 PHYSICAL PARAMETERS Physical Measurements 20TE Case Types 30TE Weight (20TE case) 2 kg – 3 kg (depending on chosen options) Weight (30TE case) 3 kg – 4 kg (depending on chosen options) Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (20TE case) W: 102.4mm H: 177.0mm D: 243.1mm Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (30TE case)
-
Page 515: Ratings
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications RATINGS 11.1 AC MEASURING INPUTS AC Measuring Inputs Nominal frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz (settable) Operating range 40 Hz to 70 Hz Phase rotation ABC or CBA 11.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS AC Current Nominal current (In) 1A and 5A dual rated* Nominal burden per phase…
-
Page 516: Power Supply
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D POWER SUPPLY 12.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24-250 V DC +/-20% Nominal operating range 110-240 V AC -20% + 10% Maximum operating range 19 to 300 V DC Frequency range for AC supply 45 – 65 Hz Ripple <15% for a DC supply (compliant with IEC 60255-11:2008) 12.2…
-
Page 517: Input / Output Connections
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications INPUT / OUTPUT CONNECTIONS 13.1 ISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS Opto-isolated digital inputs (opto-inputs) Compliance ESI 48-4 Rated nominal voltage 24 to 250 V dc Operating range 19 to 265 V dc Withstand 300 V dc Recognition time with half-cycle ac <…
-
Page 518: Watchdog Contacts
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D Unloaded contact 10000 operations min. Operate time < 5 ms Reset time < 10 ms 13.3 WATCHDOG CONTACTS Non-programmable contacts for relay healthy/relay fail indication Breaking capacity, dc resistive 30 W Breaking capacity, dc inductive 15 W (L/R = 40 ms) Breaking capacity, ac inductive 375 VA inductive (cos phi = 0.7)
-
Page 519: Environmental Conditions
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 14.1 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2005 Test Method IEC 60068-2-1:2007 and IEC 60068-2-2 2007 Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (continuous) Storage and transit temperature range -25°C to +70°C (continuous) 14.2 TEMPERATURE ENDURANCE TEST Temperature Endurance Test…
-
Page 520: Type Tests
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D TYPE TESTS 15.1 INSULATION Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2005 Insulation resistance > 100 M ohm at 500 V DC (Using only electronic/brushless insulation tester) 15.2 CREEPAGE DISTANCES AND CLEARANCES Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2005 Pollution degree Overvoltage category Impulse test voltage (not RJ45) 5 kV…
-
Page 521
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications Note: Exceptions are communications ports and normally-open output contacts, where applicable. P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 522: Electromagnetic Compatibility
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 16.1 1 MHZ BURST HIGH FREQUENCY DISTURBANCE TEST Compliance IEC 60255-22-1: 2008, Class III, IEC 60255-26:2013 Common-mode test voltage (level 3) 2.5 kV Differential test voltage (level 3) 1.0 kV 16.2 DAMPED OSCILLATORY TEST EN61000-4-18: 2011: Level 3, 100 kHz and 1 MHz.
-
Page 523: Surge Immunity Test
P14D Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications 16.6 SURGE IMMUNITY TEST Compliance IEC 61000-4-5: 2005 Level 4, IEC 60255-26:2013 Pulse duration Time to half-value: 1.2/50 µs Between all groups and protective earth conductor terminal Amplitude 4 kV Between terminals of each group (excluding communications ports, Amplitude 2 kV where applicable) 16.7…
-
Page 524: Magnetic Field Immunity
Chapter 22 — Technical Specifications P14D Test disturbance voltage 10 V rms Test using AM 1 kHz @ 80% Spot tests 27 MHz and 68 MHz 16.11 MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY IEC 61000-4-8: 2009 Level 5 Compliance IEC 61000-4-9/10: 2001 Level 5 IEC 61000-4-8 test 100 A/m applied continuously, 1000 A/m applied for 3 s IEC 61000-4-9 test…
-
Page 525: Appendix A Ordering Options
APPENDIX A ORDERING OPTIONS…
-
Page 526
Appendix A — Ordering Options P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 527
P14D Appendix A — Ordering Options Variants Order Number 1 — 4 9 10 11 12-13 14 15 Model Type Feeder Management Protection IED — Directional P14D Application Adapted to 20TE case Base Small Generator Load / Line Management HIF (SEF CT only) PWH (Wattmetric Directional Earthfault) (Standard Earth CT only) *Available up to sw55 Current/Voltage Transformers… -
Page 528
Appendix A — Ordering Options P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 529: Appendix B Settings And Signals
APPENDIX B SETTINGS AND SIGNALS…
-
Page 530
Appendix B — Settings and Signals P14D Tables, containing a full list of settings, measurement data and DDB signals for each product model, are provided in a separate interactive PDF file attached as an embedded resource. Tables are organized into a simple menu system allowing selection by language (where available), model and table type, and may be viewed and/or printed using an up-to-date version of Adobe Reader. -
Page 531: Appendix C Wiring Diagrams
APPENDIX C WIRING DIAGRAMS…
-
Page 532
Appendix C — Wiring Diagrams P14D P14D-TM-EN-8… -
Page 533
P14D Appendix C – Wiring Diagrams CORTEC MODEL EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM TITLE DRAWING-SHEET ISSUE OPTION* IO option A DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT (8 I/P & 8 O/P) 10P14D01-1 IO option A DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND SEF (8 I/P & 8 O/P) 10P14D02-1 IO option A DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT (8 I/P &… -
Page 534
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CheckedOut for Editing EARTH FAULT (8 I/P & 8 O/P) 10P14D01 Date: 28/06/2012 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date: Chkd: (STAFFORD) -
Page 535
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A7EECH. EARTH SYMBOL ADDED TO ‘In Sensitive’ LINE. NOTE 3 MODIFIED. SEF (8 I/P & 8 O/P) 10P14D02 Date: 11/03/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next… -
Page 536
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A6HC9T. NEXT SHEET 2 ADDED. NOTE 3 MODIFIED. EARTH FAULT (8 I/P & 8 O/P) WITH ETHERNET 10P14D03 Date: 29/02/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next… -
Page 537
PHASE ROTATION NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A6HC9T. -
Page 538
PHASE ROTATION NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A6HC9T. -
Page 539
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A7EECH. EARTH SYMBOL ADDED TO ‘In Sensitive’ LINE. NOTE 3 MODIFIED. SEF (8 I/P & 8 O/P) WITH ETHERNET & OPTIONAL SHORTING LINK 10P14D04 Date: 11/03/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions… -
Page 540
PHASE ROTATION NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A6HC9T. -
Page 541
PHASE ROTATION NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A6HC9T. -
Page 542
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID PWIG-8NVMDK NEW ISSUE EARTH FAULT (11 I/P & 12 O/P) WITH 2 RS485 10P14D05 Date: 03/12/2011 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date:… -
Page 543
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A7EECH. EARTH SYMBOL ADDED TO ‘In Sensitive’ LINE. NOTE 3 MODIFIED. SEF (11 I/P & 12 O/P) WITH 2 RS485 10P14D06 Date: 11/03/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next… -
Page 544
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID PWIG-8NVMDK NEW ISSUE EARTH FAULT (11 I/P & 12 O/P) WITH TCS 10P14D07 Date: 03/12/2011 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date: Chkd:… -
Page 545
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A7EECH. EARTH SYMBOL ADDED TO ‘In Sensitive’ LINE. NOTE 3 MODIFIED. SEF (11 I/P & 12 O/P) WITH TCS 10P14D08 Date: 11/03/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next… -
Page 546
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID PWIG-8NVMDK NEW ISSUE EARTH FAULT (13 I/P & 12 O/P) 10P14D09 Date: 03/12/2011 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date: Chkd:… -
Page 547
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CID SWOO-A7EECH. EARTH SYMBOL ADDED TO ‘In Sensitive’ LINE SEF (13 I/P & 12 O/P) 10P14D10 Date: 11/03/2016 Name: S.WOOTTON ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date:… -
Page 548
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND CheckedOut for Editing EARTH FAULT (8 I/P & 8 O/P) FOR KCEG 140/142 RETROFIT 10P14D11 Date: 09/05/2012 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date:… -
Page 549
Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT CID PWIG-8NVMDK NEW ISSUE WITH SEPERATE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE INPUT 8I/P + 8O/P 10P14D12 Date: 03/12/2011 Name: P.WIGGIN ALSTOM GRID UK LTD Sht: CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm Substation Automation Solutions DO NOT SCALE Next Date:… -
Page 550
PHASE ROTATION SEE NOTES 2 & 3 NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) 13 + MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title:… -
Page 551
PHASE ROTATION NOTES: C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) & (c) DISCONNECT. SHORT TERMINALS BREAK BEFORE (c). LONG TERMINAL. PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE) 13 + MODULE TERMINAL BLOCKS VIEWED FROM REAR (WITH INTEGRAL CASE EARTH STRAP) Issue: Revision: Title: P14D DIRECTIONAL PHASE OVER CURRENT AND CID SWOO-A33BK4. -
Page 552
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW PHASE ROTATION V CHECK V CHECK SYNC SYNC RELAY HEALTHY OPTIONAL FEATURE RELAY FAILED SEE NOTE 4 RELAY OUTPUT CONTACTS P14D 8I + CASE EARTH OPTO 1 NOTES: CASE EARTH OPTO 2 CONNECTION C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) &… -
Page 554
Imagination at work Grid Solutions St Leonards Building Redhill Business Park Stafford, ST16 1WT, UK +44 (0) 1785 250 070 www.gegridsolutions.com/contact © 2016 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project.
CASE EARTH OPTO 1 NOTES: CASE EARTH OPTO 2 CONNECTION C.T. SHORTING LINKS MAKE BEFORE (b) &… GE MiCOM P40 Agile: List of Available Documents
Note for Owners:
Guidesimo.com webproject is not a service center of GE trademark and does not carries out works for diagnosis and repair of faulty GE MiCOM P40 Agile equipment. For quality services, please contact an official service center of GE company. On our website you can read and download documentation for your GE MiCOM P40 Agile device for free and familiarize yourself with the technical specifications of device.
More Control Unit Devices:
-
Afag SE-Power FS FSM 2.0 STO
short description „SE-Power FS Safety Module FSM 2.0 STO“ — 1 — Version 1.5 short description SE-Power FS Safety Module FSM 2.0 STO for the servo controllers of the SE-Power FS series Translation English Afag Automation AG Fiechtenstrasse 32 CH – 4950 Huttwil Switzerland phone: +41 (0)62 959 86 86 fax: +41 (0)62 959 86 87 e-mail: [email protected] internet: www.afag.com © 201 …
SE-Power FS FSM 2.0 STO Control Unit, 4
-
AMX MAX-AOM
MAX by AMXREVOLUTIONARY IDEAMAX combines music, movies and personal multimedia content into asingle server that has the ability to store, mange, locate and play audio andvideo selections instantly, virtually anywhere desired.ENTERPRISE UPGRADESMAX’s hardware and software capabilities open new content managementopportunities in a wide variety of markets, such as corporate, education,entertainment …
MAX-AOM Server, 2
-
AMTC HYBRIDFLUSH AEF-801 SERIES
®HYBRIDFLUSH AEF-801 SERIESAUTOMATIC/MANUAL FLUSH VALVE SYSTEMFOR WATER CLOSETS (TOILETS) AND URINALSInstallation and Owner’s ManualPUSHAdvanced Modern Technologies Corporation19800 Nordhoff Place, Chatsworth, CA 91311Tel: (818) 883-2682 Toll Free: (800) 874-7822 Fax: (818) 883-2620www.amtcorporation.comREV. 07/16 …
HYBRIDFLUSH AEF-801 SERIES Control Unit, 12
-
Weathermatic N-100
NitroValvesNitro installation instructions………………………………2Instrucciones para instalar el Nitro………………………4Istruzioni per l’installazione Nitro…………………………6Installation pour l’installation des vannes Nitro…………8Installationsanleitung fur die ventile Nitro………………10Instrucoes para instalar Nitro………………………… …
N-100 Control Unit, 3
Recommended Documentation:
Table of Contents for GE MiCOM P40 Agile:
-
could also be mapped to an opto-input to provide a ‘hold off’ function for the follower CB in a ‘master/follower’ application with 2 CBs. If this optional interlock is not requir ed, DeadTime Enabled can be left unmapped, and it will default to a high state. 4.16 AR INIT TRIPTEST (INITIATE TRIP TEST) If AR Init TripTest is mapped to an opto-input , and that input is activated momentarily, the IED generates a CB trip output via AR Trip Test. The default PSL then maps this to output to the trip output relay and in
-
Chapter 6 — Current Protection Functions P14D 68 P14D-TM-EN-8
-
8 SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION With some earth faults, the fault current flowing to earth is limited by either intentional resistance (as is the case with some HV systems) or unintentional resistance (e. g. in very dry conditions and where the substrate is high resistance, such as sand or rock). To provide protection in such cases, it is necessary to provide an earth fault
-
V01216 52A 52B Output Relay +ve -ve Opto-input Circuit Breaker R3 R2 R1 Trip path Trip coil Figure 173: TCS Scheme 3 When the CB is closed, supervision curr ent passes through the opto-input, resistor R2 and the trip coil. When the CB is open, current flows through the opto-input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. The supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in either state, therefore providing pre- clo
-
Frequency «f+t [81U/81O]» Elements Average Rate of Change of Frequency «f+Df/Dt [81RAV]» Elements Stage (f+t) f Frequency Setting (Hz) (f+t) t Time Setting (Sec.) (f+Df/Dt) f Frequency Setting (Hz) (f+Df/Dt) Df Fr equency Diff Setting, (Hz) (f+Df/Dt) Dt Time Period, (Sec.) 1 49 20 49 0.5 0.5 2 48.6 20 48.6 0.5 0.5 3 48.2 10 48.2 0.5 0.5 4 47.8 10 47.8 0.5 0.5 In the above scheme, the faster load shed decisions are made by monitoring the frequency change over 500 ms. Therefor e tripping take
-
4 OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION An increased system frequency arises when the mechanical power input to a generator exceeds the electrical power output . This could happen, for instance, when there is a sudden loss of load due to tripping of an outgoing feeder from the plant to a load centre. Under such conditions, the governor would normally respond quickly to obtain a balance between the mechanical input and electrical output, thereby restoring normal frequency. Overfrequency protection is required as a backup to cater for cases where the r
-
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW The Maintenance and Troubleshooting chapter provides details of how to maintain and troubleshoot products based on the Px4x and P40Agile platforms. Always follow the w arning signs in this chapter. Failure to do so may result injury or defective equipment. Caution: Before carr ying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. The troubleshooting part of the chapter allows an error condition on t
-
Start Get number of d i sturbances from register 3×00800 Are there di sturbances? Get oldest disturbance ID fr om register 3×00801 Select required disturbance by writing the ID value of the required record to register 4×00250 Get disturbance time stamp from registers 3×00930 – 3×00933 End Extract disturbance data YesNo V0 1003 Figure 187: Manual selection of a disturbance record 6.4.6.2 AUTOMATIC EXTRACTION PR
-
Bit Indication Description Supported 1 Requested object(s) unknown The relay does not have the specified objects or there are no objects assigned to the requested class. This IIN should be used for debugging purposes and usually indicates a mismatch in device pr ofiles or configuration problems. Yes 2 Out of range Parameters in the qualifier, range or data fields are not valid or out of range. This is a ‘catch-all’ for application request formatting errors. I
-
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW The P14D provides a wide range of current protection functions. This chapter describes the operation of these functions including the principles, logic diagrams and applications. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter O verview 69 Overcurrent Protection Principles 70 Phase Overcurrent Protection 80 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Element 88 Current Setting Threshold Selection 92 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection 93 Earth Fau
-
5 LOGIC DIAGRAMS This technical manual contains many logic diagrams, which should help to explain the functionality of the device. Although this manual has been designed to be as specific as possible to the chosen product , it may contain diagrams, which have elements applicable to other products. If this is the case, a qualifying note will accompany the relevant part. The logic
-
VA (kV) 19.00 19.00 19.00 If (mA) 1.08 1.62 2.69 Rr (kΩ)* 22.00 22.00 22.00 Vr (V) 23.63 35.44 59.06 Vs (V) 11.81 17.72 29.53 *Relay and Resistor Combination Wiring Diagram P14D/P94V 15 16 9 10 E00823 Figure 105: Device connection P14D/P94V 5.3.4 SETTING GUIDELINES The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent on the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent on the method of system earthing employ ed. Also, you must ensure that the protection setting is set above an
-
CHAPTER 21 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Questions, Opinions and Exploitation Impressions:
You can ask a question, express your opinion or share our experience of GE MiCOM P40 Agile device using right now.
 |
[Page 1] GE MiCOM P40 Agile GE Grid Solutions MiCOM P40 Agile P446SV Technical Manual Distance Protection IED Hardware Version: P Software Version: 80 Publication Reference: P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 2] GE MiCOM P40 Agile … |
 |
[Page 3] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Chapter Overview 3 2 Foreword 4 2.1 Target Audience 4 2.2 Typographical Conventions 4 2.3 Nomenclature 5 2.4 Compliance 5 3 Product Scope 6 3.1 Product Versions 6 3.2 Ordering Options 7 4 Features and Functions 8 4… |
 |
[Page 4] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4.1.3 Front Serial Port (SK1) 36 4.1.4 Front Parallel Port (SK2) 37 4.1.5 Fixed Function LEDs 37 4.1.6 Programable LEDs 37 5 Rear Panel 38 6 Boards and Modules 39 6.1 PCBs 39 6.2 Main Processor Board 40 6.3 Power Supply Board 41 6.3.1 Watchdog 43 6.3… |
 |
[Page 5] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.2 Getting Started 74 3.3 Default Display 75 3.4 Default Display Navigation 76 3.5 Password Entry 77 3.6 Processing Alarms and Records 78 3.7 Menu Structure 78 3.8 Changing the Settings 79 3.9 Direct Access (The Hotkey menu) 80 3.9.1 Setting Group S… |
 |
[Page 6] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.1.3 Directional Self-Polarized Mho Characteristic for Earth Faults 112 3.1.4 Offset Mho Characteristic for Earth Faults 114 3.1.5 Memory Polarization of Mho Characteristics 116 3.1.6 Dynamic Mho Expansion and Contraction 116 3.1.7 Cross Polarizatio… |
 |
[Page 7] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.12 Teed Feeder Applications 162 Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes 165 1 Chapter Overview 167 2 Introduction 168 3 Carrier Aided Schemes Implementation 169 3.1 Carrier Aided Scheme Types 169 3.2 Default Carrier Aided Schemes 170 4 Aided Distance Schem… |
 |
[Page 8] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 7.5 Aided DEF Blocking Scheme 203 7.6 Aided Delta POR Scheme 203 7.7 Aided Delta Blocking Scheme 203 7.8 Teed Feeder Applications 204 7.8.1 POR Schemes for Teed Feeders 205 7.8.2 PUR Schemes for Teed Feeders 205 7.8.3 Blocking Schemes for Teed Feeder… |
 |
[Page 9] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.1.2 Inhibit Autoreclose Input 254 3.1.3 Block Autoreclose Input 254 3.1.4 Reset Lockout Input 255 3.1.5 Pole Discrepancy Input 255 3.1.6 External Trip Indication 255 3.2 Autoreclose Logic Inputs 255 3.2.1 Trip Initiation Signals 255 3.2.2 Circuit B… |
 |
[Page 10] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5.12.5 Single-phase Follower Timing Logic Diagram 312 5.12.6 Three-phase Follower Timing Logic Diagram 313 5.13 Circuit Breaker Autoclose 313 5.13.1 Circuit Breaker Autoclose Logic Diagram 314 5.14 Reclaim Time 314 5.14.1 Prepare Reclaim Initiation L… |
 |
[Page 11] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 Chapter Overview 359 2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection 360 2.1 POC Implementation 360 2.2 Directional Element 360 2.3 POC Logic 362 3 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection 363 3.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Implementation 363 3…. |
 |
[Page 12] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.3 Application Notes 393 3.3.1 Overvoltage Setting Guidelines 393 4 Compensated Overvoltage 394 5 Residual Overvoltage Protection 395 5.1 Residual Overvoltage Protection Implementation 395 5.2 Residual Overvoltage Logic 396 5.3 Application Notes 396… |
 |
[Page 13] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5.8.3 Setting the thresholds for the Operating Time 426 5.8.4 Setting the Thresholds for Excesssive Fault Frequency 426 6 CB State Monitoring 427 6.1 CB State Monitor 428 7 Circuit Breaker Control 429 7.1 CB Control using the IED Menu 429 7.2 CB Cont… |
 |
[Page 14] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 Chapter Overview 461 2 Configuring Digital Inputs and Outputs 462 3 Scheme Logic 463 3.1 PSL Editor 464 3.2 PSL Schemes 464 3.3 PSL Scheme Version Control 464 4 Configuring the Opto-Inputs 465 5 Assigning the Output Relays 466 6 Fixed Function LEDs… |
 |
[Page 15] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.2.1 EIA(RS)485 Biasing Requirements 508 3.3 K-Bus 508 4 Standard Ethernet Communication 510 4.1 Hot-Standby Ethernet Failover 510 5 Redundant Ethernet Communication 511 5.1 Supported Protocols 511 5.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol 512 5.3 High-Avail… |
 |
[Page 16] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 7.1 Courier 540 7.1.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer 540 7.1.2 Courier Database 541 7.1.3 Settings Categories 541 7.1.4 Setting Changes 541 7.1.5 Event Extraction 541 7.1.6 Disturbance Record Extraction 543 7.1.7 Programmable Scheme Logic Setting… |
 |
[Page 17] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 22 Cyber-Security 575 1 Overview 577 2 The Need for Cyber-Security 578 3 Standards 579 3.1 NERC Compliance 579 3.1.1 CIP 002 580 3.1.2 CIP 003 580 3.1.3 CIP 004 580 3.1.4 CIP 005 580 3.1.5 CIP 006 580 3.1.6 CIP 007 581 3.1.7 CIP 008 581 3.1.8… |
 |
[Page 18] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4.13 GPS Fibre Connection 603 4.14 Fibre Communication Connections 603 5 Case Dimensions 604 5.1 Case Dimensions 40TE 604 Chapter 24 Commissioning Instructions 605 1 Chapter Overview 607 2 General Guidelines 608 3 Commissioning Test Menu 609 3.1 Opto… |
 |
[Page 19] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.2.3 Simulating a Channel Failure 625 7 Intermicom 64 Communication 626 7.1 Checking the Interface 626 7.2 Setting up the Loopback 627 7.3 Loopback Test 627 8 Setting Checks 628 8.1 Apply Application-specific Settings 628 8.1.1 Transferring Settings… |
 |
[Page 20] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 12.2 Scheme Testing 645 12.2.1 Signal Send Test for Permissive Schemes 645 12.2.2 Signal Send Test for Blocking Schemes 645 13 Out of Step Protection 646 13.1 OST Setting 646 13.2 Predictive OST Setting 647 13.3 Predictive and OST Setting 647 13.4 OS… |
 |
[Page 21] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2.5 Replacing PCBs 669 2.5.1 Replacing the main processor board 669 2.5.2 Replacement of communications boards 670 2.5.3 Replacement of the input module 671 2.5.4 Replacement of the power supply board 671 2.5.5 Replacement of the I/O boards 672 2.6 R… |
 |
[Page 22] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.6 Phase Overcurrent Protection 689 3.6.1 Transient Overreach and Overshoot 690 3.6.2 Phase Overcurrent Directional Parameters 690 3.7 Earth Fault Protection 690 3.7.1 Earth Fault Directional Parameters 690 3.8 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection 691 3… |
 |
[Page 23] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 11.4 Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements 704 11.5 Surge Withstand Capability 704 11.6 Surge Immunity Test 705 11.7 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy 705 11.8 Radiated Immunity from Digital Communications 705 11.9 Radiated Immuni… |
 |
[Page 24] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Contents P446SV xxii P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 25] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Table of Figures Figure 1: P40L family — version evolution 7 Figure 2: Key to logic diagrams 12 Figure 3: Functional Overview 13 Figure 4: Hardware architecture 32 Figure 5: Exploded view of IED 33 Figure 6: Front panel (40TE) 35 Figure 7: Rear view … |
 |
[Page 26] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 39: Simplified forward fault 116 Figure 40: Mho expansion – forward fault 117 Figure 41: Simplified Reverse Fault 118 Figure 42: Mho contraction – reverse fault 119 Figure 43: Simplified quadrilateral characteristics 121 Figure 44: General… |
 |
[Page 27] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 78: PUR Aided Tripping logic 181 Figure 79: POR Aided Tripping logic 183 Figure 80: Aided Scheme Blocking 1 Tripping logic 183 Figure 81: Aided Scheme Blocking 2 Tripping logic 183 Figure 82: Virtual Current Polarization 186 Figure 83: Directi… |
 |
[Page 28] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 118: Phase selector timing for power swing condition 231 Figure 119: Phase selector timing for fault condition 231 Figure 120: Phase selector timing for fault during a power swing 232 Figure 121: Slow Power Swing detection characteristic 233 F… |
 |
[Page 29] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 157: Autoreclose Initiation logic diagram (Module 11) 299 Figure 158: Autoreclose Trip Test logic diagram (Module 12) 299 Figure 159: Autoreclose initiation by internal single and three phase trip or external trip for CB1 (Module 13) 300 Figur… |
 |
[Page 30] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 196: CB Manual Close System Check Logic Diagram (Modules 51 & 52) 340 Figure 197: Circuit Breaker Fail logic — part 1 351 Figure 198: Circuit Breaker Fail logic — part 2 352 Figure 199: Circuit Breaker Fail logic — part 3 353 Figure 200: C… |
 |
[Page 31] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 236: Default function key PSL 431 Figure 237: Remote Control of Circuit Breaker 432 Figure 238: CB1 Control Logic (Module 43) 433 Figure 239: CB2 Control Logic (Module 44) 434 Figure 240: Pole Dead logic 435 Figure 241: Check Synchronisation v… |
 |
[Page 32] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 275: Redundant Ethernet ring architecture with IED, bay computer and Ethernet switches after failure 517 Figure 276: Dual homing mechanism 518 Figure 277: Application of Dual Homing Star at substation level 519 Figure 278: IED and REB IP addre… |
 |
[Page 33] GE MiCOM P40 Agile CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION |
 |
[Page 34] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 1 — Introduction P446SV 2 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 35] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides some general information about the technical manual and an introduction to the device(s) described in this technical manual. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview 3 Foreword 4 Product … |
 |
[Page 36] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2 FOREWORD This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of General Electric’s P446SV, as well as a comprehensive set of instructions for using the device. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are al… |
 |
[Page 37] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2.3 NOMENCLATURE Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product- specific terms… |
 |
[Page 38] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3 PRODUCT SCOPE Unlike a conventional IED, a device with an IEC61850-9-2 interface, or Sampled Value (SV) device accepts current and voltage measurement inputs, which have already been digitized in accordance with the IEC 61850-9-2LE standard. The P4… |
 |
[Page 39] GE MiCOM P40 Agile V00062 XCPU3 Cyber-security New Protection functions P445: P41 P54x No Distance: M61 P841A: M61 All other products: M71 New Protection functions P445: P45 P54x No Distance: M65 P841A: M65 All other products: M75 Current Dif… |
 |
[Page 40] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS 4.1 DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Distance zones, full-scheme protection (5) DisPDIS 21/21N Phase characteristic (Mho and quadrilateral) Ground characteristic (Mho and quadrilateral) CVT transient overr… |
 |
[Page 41] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Rate of change of frequency protection (4 stages) DfpPFRC 81 High speed breaker fail suitable for re-tripping and back- tripping (2 stages) RBRF 50BF Current Transformer supervision 46 Voltage transformer supervision 47/27 Auto… |
 |
[Page 42] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Feature ANSI Front RS232 serial communication port for configuration 16S Rear serial RS485 communication port for SCADA control 16S 2 Additional rear serial communication ports for SCADA control and teleprotection (fibre and copper) (optional) 16S Et… |
 |
[Page 43] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5 LOGIC DIAGRAMS This technical manual contains many logic diagrams, which should help to explain the functionality of the device. Although this manual has been designed to be as specific as possible to the chosen product, it may contain diagrams, wh… |
 |
[Page 44] GE MiCOM P40 Agile V00063 Key: DDB Signal Internal function &AND gate OR gate 1 Setting cell Setting value Timer SR Latch Reset Dominant Internal Signal 0Logic 0 Comparator for detecting overvalues Energising Quantity Hardcoded setting R D Q S Comparator for detec… |
 |
[Page 45] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW This diagram is applicable to three products in the P40L family; P443, P445 and P446. Use the key on the diagram to determine the features relevant to the product described in this technical manual. V00010 X X X I E sen 67 50/27… |
 |
[Page 46] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 1 — Introduction P446SV 14 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 47] GE MiCOM P40 Agile CHAPTER 2 SAFETY INFORMATION |
 |
[Page 48] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 2 — Safety Information P446SV 16 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 49] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides information about the safe handling of the equipment. The equipment must be properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition and to keep personnel safe at all times. You must be famil… |
 |
[Page 50] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2 HEALTH AND SAFETY Personnel associated with the equipment must be familiar with the contents of this Safety Information. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment. Improper use of th… |
 |
[Page 51] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3 SYMBOLS Throughout this manual you will come across the following symbols. You will also see these symbols on parts of the equipment. Caution: Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment Warning: Risk … |
 |
[Page 52] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4.1 LIFTING HAZARDS Many injuries are caused by: ● Lifting heavy objects ● Lifting things incorrectly ● Pushing or pulling heavy objects ● Using the same muscles repetitively Plan carefully, identif… |
 |
[Page 53] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Caution: NEVER look into optical fibres or optical output connections. Always use optical power meters to determine operation or signal level. Warning: Testing may leave capacitors charged to dangerous voltage levels. Discharge capacitors by rediucin… |
 |
[Page 54] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Caution: Digital input circuits should be protected by a high rupture capacity NIT or TIA fuse with maximum rating of 16 A. for safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect … |
 |
[Page 55] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Caution: Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of stud-connected PCTs. Caution: The recommended minimum PCT wire size is 2.5 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 230 V (e.g. Europe) and 3.3 mm² for countries whose mains supp… |
 |
[Page 56] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Note: For most Alstom equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination is automatically shorted if the module is removed. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required. Check the e… |
 |
[Page 57] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL Caution: Before decommissioning, completely isolate the equipment power supplies (both poles of any dc supply). The auxiliary supply input may have capacitors in parallel, which may still be charged. To avoid electric s… |
 |
[Page 58] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a technical file. 6.1 EMC COMPLIANCE: 2014/30/EU The product specific Declaration of Conformity (DoC) lists the relevant harmonised standar… |
 |
[Page 59] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Where: ‘II’ Equipment Group: Industrial. ‘(2)G’ High protection equipment category, for control of equipment in gas atmospheres in Zone 1 and 2. This equipment (with parentheses marking around the zone number) is not itself suitab… |
 |
[Page 60] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 2 — Safety Information P446SV 28 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 61] GE MiCOM P40 Agile CHAPTER 3 HARDWARE DESIGN |
 |
[Page 62] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P446SV 30 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 63] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter provides information about the product’s hardware design. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview 31 Hardware Architecture 32 Mechanical Implementation 33 Front Panel 35 Rear Panel 38 Boards… |
 |
[Page 64] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE The main components comprising an General Electric Sampled Values device are as follows: ● The housing, consisting of a front panel and connections at the rear ● The Main processor module consisting of the main CPU (Centra… |
 |
[Page 65] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3 MECHANICAL IMPLEMENTATION All products based on the Px4x platform have common hardware architecture. The hardware is modular and consists of the following main parts: ● Case and terminal blocks ● Boards and modules ● Front panel The case comp… |
 |
[Page 66] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Case width (TE) Case width (mm) Case width (inches) 40TE 203.2 8 60TE 304.8 12 80TE 406.4 16 Note: Not all case sizes are available for all models. 3.2 LIST OF BOARDS The product’s hardware consists of several modules drawn from a standard range… |
 |
[Page 67] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4 FRONT PANEL 4.1 40TE FRONT PANEL The following diagram shows a 40TE case. The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the front panel are shown closed. An optional transparent front cover physically protects the front panel. Figure 6: Front panel (4… |
 |
[Page 68] GE MiCOM P40 Agile The bottom compartment contains: ● A compartment for a 1/2 AA size backup battery (used to back up the real time clock and event, fault, and disturbance records). ● A 9-pin female D-type front port for an EIA(RS)232 serial connection to a PC. ●… |
 |
[Page 69] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Note: The front serial port does not support automatic extraction of event and disturbance records, although this data can be accessed manually. 4.1.3.1 FRONT SERIAL PORT (SK1) CONNECTIONS The port pin-out follows the standard for Data Communication … |
 |
[Page 70] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5 REAR PANEL The MiCOM P40Agile Modular series uses a modular construction. Most of the internal workings are on boards and modules which fit into slots. Some of the boards plug into terminal blocks, which are bolted onto the rear of the unit. Howeve… |
 |
[Page 71] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6 BOARDS AND MODULES Each product comprises a selection of PCBs (Printed Circuit Boards) and subassemblies, depending on the chosen configuration. 6.1 PCBS A PCB typically consists of the components, a front connector for connecting into the main sys… |
 |
[Page 72] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.2 MAIN PROCESSOR BOARD Figure 9: Main processor board The main processor board performs all calculations and controls the operation of all other modules in the IED, including the data communication and user interfaces. This is the only board that d… |
 |
[Page 73] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.3 POWER SUPPLY BOARD Figure 10: Power supply board The power supply board provides power to the unit. One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the unit. This is specified at the time of order and depends on t… |
 |
[Page 74] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 11: Power supply assembly The power supply outputs are used to provide isolated power supply rails to the various modules within the unit. Three voltage levels are used by the unit’s modules: ● 5.1 V for all of the digital circuits ● +/-… |
 |
[Page 75] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 12: Power supply terminals 6.3.1 WATCHDOG The Watchdog contacts are also hosted on the power supply board. The Watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed. These are used to indicate the heal… |
 |
[Page 76] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 13: Watchdog contact terminals 6.3.2 REAR SERIAL PORT The rear serial port (RP1) is housed on the power supply board. This is a three-terminal EIA(RS)485 serial communications port and is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to… |
 |
[Page 77] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Figure 14: Rear serial port terminals An additional serial port with D-type presentation is available as an optional board, if required. 6.4 IEC61850-9-2LE ETHERNET BOARD RX TX LINK ACTIVITY Fibre optic Ethernet connections RJ45 service port for … |
 |
[Page 78] GE MiCOM P40 Agile RJ45 Connector This is a service port for commissioning and testing only. Do not use this for permanent connections. LEDs LED Function On Off Flashing Green Link Link ok Link broken Yellow Activity Traffic Note: The 9-2LE interface fibre port does no… |
 |
[Page 79] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Terminal Number Output Relay Terminal 4 Relay 2 NO Terminal 5 Relay 3 NO Terminal 6 Relay 3 NO Terminal 7 Relay 4 NO Terminal 8 Relay 4 NO Terminal 9 Relay 5 NO Terminal 10 Relay 5 NO Terminal 11 Relay 6 NO Terminal 12 Relay 6 NO Terminal 13 Relay 7 … |
 |
[Page 80] GE MiCOM P40 Agile The IRIG-B facility is provided in combination with other functionality on a number of additional boards, such as: ● Fibre board with IRIG-B ● Second rear communications board with IRIG-B ● Ethernet board with IRIG-B ● Redundant Ethernet boar… |
 |
[Page 81] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.8 REAR COMMUNICATION BOARD Figure 19: Rear communication board The optional communications board containing the secondary communication ports provide two serial interfaces presented on 9 pin D-type connectors. These interfaces are known as SK4 and … |
 |
[Page 82] GE MiCOM P40 Agile This is a communications board that provides a standard 100-Base Ethernet interface. This board supports one electrical copper connection and one fibre-pair connection. There are several variants for this board as follows: ● 100 Mbps Ethernet board… |
 |
[Page 83] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.10 REDUNDANT ETHERNET BOARD IRIG-B Pin3 Link Fail connector Pin 2 Pin 1 Link channel A (green LED) Activity channel A (yellow LED) Link channel B (green LED) Activity channel B (yellow LED) A B C D V01009 Figure 21: Redundant Ethernet board… |
 |
[Page 84] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Link Fail Connector (Ethernet Board Watchdog Relay) Pin Closed Open 1-2 Link fail Channel 1 (A) Link ok Channel 1 (A) 2-3 Link fail Channel 2 (B) Link ok Channel 2 (B) LEDs LED Function On Off Flashing Green Link Link ok Link broken Yellow Activity S… |
 |
[Page 85] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 6.11 COPROCESSOR BOARD Figure 22: Fully populated Coprocessor board Note: The above figure shows a coprocessor complete with GPS input and 2 fibre-optic serial data interfaces, and is not necessarily representative of the product and model described … |
 |
[Page 86] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Note: The 1 pps signal is always supplied by a GPS receiver (such as a P594). Note: This signal is used to control the sampling process, and timing calculations and is not used for time stamping or real time synchronisation. 6.12 HIGH BREAK OUTPUT RE… |
 |
[Page 87] GE MiCOM P40 Agile V00246 3.5ms + contact bounce Load current Relay contact Databus control input MOSFET reset MOSFET operate on 7ms on 3.5ms Closed on 7ms off Figure 24: High Break contact operation High Break Contact Applications ● Efficient scheme engineering In … |
 |
[Page 88] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 3 — Hardware Design P446SV 56 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 89] GE MiCOM P40 Agile CHAPTER 4 SOFTWARE DESIGN |
 |
[Page 90] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Chapter 4 — Software Design P446SV 58 P446SV-TM-EN-1 |
 |
[Page 91] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW This chapter describes the software design of the IED. This chapter contains the following sections: Chapter Overview 59 Sofware Design Overview 60 System Level Software 61 Platform Software 64 Protection and Control Functions 65 P… |
 |
[Page 92] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 2 SOFWARE DESIGN OVERVIEW The device software can be conceptually categorized into several elements as follows: ● The system level software ● The platform software ● The protection and control software These elements are not distinguishable to … |
 |
[Page 93] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE 3.1 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM The real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the various tasks. This ensures that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operat… |
 |
[Page 94] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 3.4.2 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE INITIALISATION The initialization process initializes the processor registers and interrupts, starts the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starts the real-time opera… |
 |
[Page 95] GE MiCOM P40 Agile If the problem is with the battery status or the IRIG-B board, the device continues in operation. For problems detected in any other area, the device initiates a shutdown and re-boot, resulting in a period of up to 10 seconds when the functionality i… |
 |
[Page 96] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 4 PLATFORM SOFTWARE The platform software has three main functions: ● To control the logging of records generated by the protection software, including alarms, events, faults, and maintenance records ● To store and maintain a database of all of t… |
 |
[Page 97] GE MiCOM P40 Agile 5 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS The protection and control software processes all of the protection elements and measurement functions. To achieve this it has to communicate with the system services software, the platform software as well as organ… |
 |
[Page 98] GE MiCOM P40 Agile capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) transients in the voltages. The device uses a combination of a 1/4 cycle filter using 12 coefficients, a 1/2 cycle filter using 24 coefficients, and a single cycle filter using 48 coefficients. The device automatic… |
 |
[Page 99] GE MiCOM P40 Agile Ideal anti-alias filter response Real anti-alias filter response 2 3… 1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 241 50 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz V00306 Fourier Response without anti-alias filter Fourier Response with anti-alias filter Alias frequency Figure 27: Frequency Resp… |
 |
[Page 100] GE MiCOM P40 Agile For more information, see the Monitoring and Control chapter. 5.8 DISTURBANCE RECORDER The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 12 calibrated analog channels and … |